1 files changed, 7996 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/9948.txt b/9948.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e6e3deb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/9948.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7996 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat, by George A. Warren
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat
+       or, The Secret of Cedar Island
+
+Author: George A. Warren
+
+Posting Date: November 5, 2011 [EBook #9948]
+Release Date: February, 2006
+First Posted: November 3, 2006
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat
+
+OR
+
+The Secret of Cedar Island
+
+By GEORGE A. WARREN
+
+1913
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+CHAPTER
+
+
+     I THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES
+
+    II GLORIOUS NEWS
+
+   III FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST
+
+    IV LAYING IN THE STORES
+
+     V JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN
+
+    VI THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN
+
+   VII STUCK FAST IN THE MUD
+
+  VIII WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED
+
+    IX ON THE SWIFT RADWAY
+
+     X DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES
+
+    XI THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND
+
+   XII WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR?
+
+  XIII THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND
+
+   XIV TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT
+
+    XV ORDERED OFF
+
+   XVI UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS
+
+  XVII PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK"
+
+ XVIII WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH
+
+   XIX LAYING PLANS
+
+    XX THE EXPLORING PARTY
+
+   XXI A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE
+
+  XXII THE WIGWAG MESSAGE
+
+ XXIII STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE
+
+  XXIV THE DISCOVERY
+
+   XXV TIME TO GO BACK
+
+  XXVI HONORABLE SCARS
+
+ XXVII ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL
+
+XXVIII PREPARED FOR THE WORST
+
+  XXIX LIFTING THE LID
+
+   XXX GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND
+
+  XXXI A SCOUT'S DUTY
+
+ XXXII CONCLUSION
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+
+Dear Boys:--
+
+It is with the greatest pleasure that I present you with the third volume
+of the "Banner Boy Scouts Series." This is a complete story in itself;
+and yet most of the leading characters you, who have already read the
+first and second volumes, will easily remember. I trust you will heartily
+welcome the appearance once more on the stage of Paul, Jack, Bobolink and
+all the other good fellows belonging to Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts.
+
+Those of you who are old friends will recollect that while the Red Fox
+Patrol was forming, the boys had a most strenuous time, what with a deep
+mystery in their midst, and the bitter strife resulting from their
+competition with rival troops belonging to neighboring towns. How the
+beautiful banner was cleverly won by Stanhope, I related in the first
+volume, called: "The Banner Boy Scouts."
+
+In the succeeding story the Stanhope Scouts went on their first long
+hike, to camp in the open. The remarkable adventures they met with
+while enjoying this experience; as well as the stirring account of how
+they recovered a box of valuable papers that had been stolen from the
+office of Joe Clausin's father, form the main theme of "The Banner Boy
+Scouts on a Tour."
+
+And now, in this third book, I have endeavored to interest you in another
+series of happenings that befell these wide-awake boys before their
+summer vacation was over. I hope you will, after reading this story
+through to the last line, agree with me that what the young assistant
+scout master, Paul Morrison, and his chums of Stanhope Troop endured
+while afloat all went to make them better and truer scouts in every sense
+of the word.
+
+Cordially yours
+
+GEORGE A. WARREN.
+
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+THE MYSTERIOUS BOXES
+
+
+"What are you limping for, Bobolink?"
+
+"Oh! shucks! I see there's no use trying to hide anything from your sharp
+eyes, Jack Stormways. Guess I just about walked my feet off today, goin'
+fishin' with our patrol leader, away over to the Radway River, and about
+six miles up."
+
+"Have any luck, Bobolink?" instantly demanded the third member of the
+group of three half-grown boys, who were passing after nightfall through
+some of the partly deserted streets on the outskirts of the thriving town
+of Stanhope; and whose name it might be stated was Tom Betts.
+
+"Well, I should say, yes. Between us we got seven fine bass, and a
+pickerel. By the way, I caught that pickerel; Paul, he looked after the
+bass end of the string, and like the bully chap he is divided with me;"
+and the boy who limped chuckled as he said this, showing that he could
+appreciate a joke, even when it was on himself.
+
+About everybody in town called him Bobolink; and what boy could do
+otherwise, seeing that his real name was Robert O. Link?
+
+As the trio of lads were all dressed in the khaki suits known all over
+the world nowadays as typifying Boy Scouts, it could be readily taken for
+granted that they belonged to the Stanhope Troop.
+
+Already were there three full patrols enlisted, and wearing uniforms;
+while a fourth was in process of forming. The ones already in the field
+were known as, first, the Red Fox, to which these three lads belonged;
+then the Gray Fox, and finally the Black Fox. But as they had about
+exhausted the color roster of the fox family, the chances were that the
+next patrol would have to start on a new line when casting about for a
+name that would stamp their identity, and serve as a totem.
+
+An efficient scout master had been secured in the person of a young man
+by the name of Mr. Gordon, who cheerfully accompanied the lads on their
+outings, and attended many of their meetings. But being a traveling
+salesman, Mr. Gordon often had to be away from home for weeks at a time.
+
+When these lapses occurred, his duties fell upon the shoulders of Paul
+Morrison, who not only filled the position of leader to the Red Fox
+Patrol, but being a first-class scout, had received his commission from
+Headquarters that entitled him to act as assistant scout master to the
+whole troop during the absence of Mr. Gordon.
+
+"How did you like it up on the Radway?" continued the one who had made
+the first inquiry, Jack Stormways, whose father owned a lumber yard and
+planing mill just outside the limits of the town, which was really the
+goal of their present after-supper walk.
+
+"Great place, all right," replied Bobolink. "Paul kept calling my
+attention to all the things worth seeing. He seems to think a heap of the
+old Radway. For my part, I rather fancy our own tight little river, the
+Bushkill."
+
+"Well, d'ye know, that's one reason I asked how you liked it," Jack went
+on. "Paul seemed so much taken with that region over there, I've begun to
+get a notion in my head he's fixing a big surprise, and that perhaps at
+the meeting to-night he may spring it on us."
+
+"Tell me about that, will you?" exclaimed Bobolink, who was given to
+certain harmless slang ways whenever he became in the least excited, as
+at present. "Now that you've been and gone and given me a pointer, I c'n
+just begin to get a line on a few of the questions he asked me. Well,
+I'm willing to leave it to Paul. He always thinks of the whole shooting
+match when trying to give the troop a bully good time. Just remember
+what we went through with when we camped out up on Rattlesnake Mountain,
+will you?"
+
+"That's right," declared Tom Betts, eagerly; "say, didn't we have the
+time of our lives, though?"
+
+"And yet Paul said only today that as we had so long a time before
+vacation ends this year, a chance might pop up for another trip,"
+Bobolink remarked, significantly.
+
+"Did, eh? Well, don't that go to prove what I said; and you just wait
+till we get back to the meeting room in the church. Paul's just bursting
+with some sort of secret, and I reckon he'll just have to tell us
+to-night," and Jack laughed good-naturedly as he still led his two
+comrades on toward the retired lane, where his father's big mill adjoined
+the storage place for lumber; convenient to the river, and at the same
+time near the railroad, so that a spur track could enter the yard.
+
+Besides these three boys five others constituted the Red Fox Patrol of
+Stanhope Troop. In the first story of this series, which appeared under
+the name of "The Banner Boy Scouts; Or, The Struggle for Leadership,"
+the reader was told about the formation of the Red Fox Patrol, and how
+some of the boys learned a lesson in scout methods of returning good for
+evil; also how a cross old farmer was taught that he owed a duty to the
+community in which he lived, as well as to himself. In that story it was
+also disclosed how a resident of the town offered a beautiful banner to
+that troop which excelled in an open tournament also participated in by
+two other troops of Boy Scouts from the towns of Aldine and Manchester;
+the former on the east bank of the Bushkill, about six miles up-stream,
+and the latter a bustling manufacturing place about seven miles down, and
+also on the same bank as Aldine.
+
+In this competition, after a lively duel between the three wide awake
+troops, Stanhope won handsomely; and had therefore been given the banner,
+which Wallace Carberry proudly carried at the head of the procession
+whenever they paraded.
+
+The second book, "The Banner Boy Scouts on a Tour; Or, The Mystery of
+Rattlesnake Mountain," was given over almost exclusively to descriptions
+of the wonderful things that came to pass when Stanhope Troop spent a
+part of their vacation camping out in order that those who were backward
+in their knowledge of how to take care of themselves when in the open
+should have a good chance to learn many of the secrets of Nature.
+
+So many strange things happened to the boys when up on Rattlesnake
+Mountain that it would be utterly impossible to even mention them here;
+but if you wish to know all about the mystery they solved, and the
+numerous other exciting events that befell them, you must get the
+second volume.
+
+There was to be a special meeting, which the acting scout master had
+called for this evening; and Bobolink, Jack, and Tom Betts expected to
+be back from their errand in time to answer to their names when the roll
+was called.
+
+It was only to oblige Jack that the other two had left home half an hour
+earlier than was really necessary. Jack had asked them, over the
+telephone, to drop around, as he had to go out to his father's mill
+before he could attend the meeting in the church, where a room in the
+basement had been kindly loaned to them by the trustees.
+
+"What's all this mean about you going to the mill at this queer old
+hour?" Bobolink was saying, as the three boys continued to walk on
+abreast, the speaker carrying the silver-plated bugle which he knew how
+to manipulate so well when the occasion allowed its use.
+
+"Why, you see it's this way," Jack went on to explain. "My father knows a
+man of the name of Professor Hackett, though what he's a professor of
+you needn't ask me, because I don't know. But he's a bright little
+gentleman, all right; and somehow or other he looks like he's just cram
+full of some secret that's trying to break out all over him."
+
+Bobolink laughed aloud.
+
+"Well, that's a funny description you give of the gentleman, I must say,
+Jack; but go on--what's he got to do with our making this trip to the big
+mill tonight?"
+
+"I just guess it's got everything to do with it," replied the other. "You
+see, the professor had a number of big cases sent up here on the train,
+and they came today, and were taken to the mill; for my father promised
+to keep them there a couple of days until the owner could take them away.
+What under the sun's in those big boxes I couldn't tell you from Adam;
+all I know is that he seems to be mighty much afraid somebody's going to
+steal them."
+
+"Wow! and are we going there to stand guard over the blooming old
+things?" exclaimed Bobolink in dismay; for he would not want to miss that
+special meeting for anything.
+
+"Oh! not quite so bad as that," answered Jack, with a laugh. "But you
+see, that professor wrote my father that he wanted him to hire a trusty
+man who would stay in the mill over night until he could get up here
+from New York and take the boxes away, somewhere or other."
+
+"Oh, that's it, eh? And where do we find the guardian of the treasure? Is
+he going to bob up on the road to the mill?" Tom Betts demanded.
+
+"He promised father to be on deck at seven-thirty, and it'll be close on
+that by the time we get there, I reckon," Jack continued.
+
+"And what have you got to do about it?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"Let him in, and lock the door after he's on duty," replied Jack,
+promptly. "You see, ever since that attempt was made to burn the mill,
+when those hoboes, or yeggs, thought they'd find money in the safe, and
+had their trouble for their pains, my father has been mighty careful how
+he leaves the office unfastened. He couldn't see this man, Hans Waggoner,
+who used to work for us, but talked with him over the 'phone, and told
+him I'd be there to meet him, and let him in. That's all there is to it,
+boys, believe me."
+
+"Only, you don't know what's in those boxes, and you'd give a cookie to
+find out?" suggested Bobolink.
+
+"It isn't so bad as that," replied the other. "Of course I'm a little
+curious about what they might hold, that they have to be specially
+guarded; but I guess it's none of my business, and I'm not going to
+monkey around, trying to find out."
+
+"Say, d'ye suppose your dad knows?" asked Tom.
+
+"Sure he must," came from Jack, instantly. "He'd be silly to let anybody
+store a lot of cases that might hold dynamite, or any other old
+explosive, in his planing mill, without knowing all about 'em; wouldn't
+he? But my father don't think it's any of my affair, you see. And
+besides, I wouldn't be surprised if that funny little professor had bound
+him not to tell anybody about it. They got the boxes in on the sly, and
+that's a fact, boys."
+
+"Oh! splash! now you've got me worked up with guessing, and I'll never be
+able to sleep till I know all about it," grumbled Bobolink.
+
+"You're just as curious as any old woman I ever heard of," declared Jack.
+
+"He always was," said Tom Betts, with a chuckle, "and I could string off
+more'n a few times when that same curiosity hauled Bobolink into a peck
+of trouble. But p'raps your father might let out the secret to you, after
+the old boxes have been taken away, and then you can ease his mind.
+Because it's just like he says, and he'll keep on dreamin' the most
+wonderful things about those cases you ever heard tell about. That
+imagination of Bobolink is something awful."
+
+"Huh!" grunted the one under discussion, "not much worse than some
+others I know about right now; only they c'n keep a tight grip on
+theirs, and I'm that simple I just have to blurt everything out. Both of
+you fellers'd like to know nearly as much as I would, what that
+mysterious little old man has got hid away in those big cases. Of course
+you would. But you jump on the lid, and hold it down. It gets away with
+me; that's all."
+
+"All the same, it's mighty good of you fellows, coming all the way out
+here with me tonight; and even when Bobolink's got a stone bruise on his
+heel, or something like that," Jack went on to say, with a vein of
+sincere affection in his voice; for the boys making up the Red Fox Patrol
+of Stanhope Troop were very fond of each other.
+
+"Oh! rats! what's the good of being a scout if you can't do a comrade a
+little favor once in a while?" asked Bobolink, impetuously. "But there's
+the mill looming up ahead, Jack, in the dark. Half a moon don't give a
+whole lot of light, now, does it; and especially when it's a cloudy night
+in the bargain?"
+
+"Well, I declare!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+"What is it; did you see anything?" demanded Tom Betts, hastily.
+
+"I'm not dead sure," admitted Jack; "you see, just as Bobolink said, the
+light's mighty poor, and a fellow could easily be mistaken; but I
+thought I saw something that looked like a tall man scuttle away around
+that corner of the mill, and dodge behind that pile of lumber!"
+
+"Whew!" ejaculated Bobolink, showing the utmost interest, for excitement
+appealed to him.
+
+"Say, perhaps Hans has arrived ahead of the half hour," suggested
+Tom Betts.
+
+"No, it wasn't Hans, because I know him well, and he's a little runt of a
+Dutchman, but a fighter from the word go; and my father knows nobody's
+going to get away with those boxes of the professor while Hans and his
+musket, that was used in the Civil War, are on guard. That was a tall
+man, and he ran like he'd just heard us coming, and wanted to hide. I
+guess somebody else is curious about those boxes, besides Bobolink."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+GLORIOUS NEWS
+
+
+"Look! there he goes scooting away over past that other pile of lumber!"
+said Tom Betts, pointing as he spoke; and both the others caught a
+glimpse of a dim figure that was bending over while hurrying away, as if
+anxious not to be seen.
+
+"Well, what d'ye think of the nerve of that?" ejaculated Bobolink, making
+a move as though in his impetuous way he was sorely tempted to chase
+after the disappearing figure of the unknown; only that the more cautious
+Jack threw out a hand, and caught hold of his sleeve.
+
+"Never mind him, boys," remarked the son of the lumber man. "Perhaps it
+was only a tramp from the railroad, after all, meaning to find a place to
+sleep among the lumber piles. But I'm going to tell my father about it,
+all the same. Seems to me he ought to have some one like Hans stay here
+every night. Some of those hoboes will set fire to things, either by
+accident, or because they are mad at the town for not handing enough good
+things out to suit their appetites."
+
+They walked on, and in another minute were at the office door. There they
+sat down on the stoop to rest and talk; but only a few minutes had passed
+when they heard the sound of approaching footsteps; and a small but very
+erect figure appeared, carrying an old-fashioned musket of the vintage of
+'61 over his shoulder.
+
+"Hello! Hans, on time all right, I see!" called out Jack.
+
+"Dot is me, I dells you, every time. I am punctuality idself. I sets me
+der clock, undt figure dot all oudt, so I haf yust der time to valk here.
+Der sooner you obens der door, Misder Jack, der sooner I pe on der chob,"
+was the reply of the little man who had been hired to watch the mill, and
+those strange boxes, during the night.
+
+Evidently Hans was "strictly business." He had been hired to watch, and
+he wanted to be earning his wages as quickly as possible.
+
+So Jack used his key, and the four entered the office. It was quite a
+good-sized room. The windows were covered with heavy wire netting, and it
+seemed strong enough to resist any ordinary degree of force. After that
+attempt to rob his safe, Mr. Stormways had taken precautions against a
+similar raid.
+
+The watchman also carried a lantern, which he now lighted. No sooner had
+this been done than Bobolink uttered an exclamation.
+
+"I reckon now, Jack, that these three big boxes are the ones the
+professor wants watched?" he observed, pointing as he spoke to several
+cumbersome cases that stood in a group, occupying considerable space.
+
+Tom Betts, also looking, saw that they were unusually well fastened. In
+addition to the ordinary nailing, they were bound along the edges with
+heavy twisted wire, through which frequent nails had been driven. When
+they came to be opened, the job would prove no easy one.
+
+"Yes, those are the ones; and Hans is to spend most all his time right
+here in the office," Jack went on to say. "I'm going to ask my father if
+he ought not to hire you to be night watchman right along, Hans. This
+plant of ours is getting too big a thing to leave unguarded, with so many
+tramps coming along the road in the good old summer time. I suppose you'd
+like the job, all right?"
+
+"Sure," replied the bustling little man, his eyes sparkling. "I always
+did enchoy vorkin' for Misder Stormways. Undt it habbens dot yust now I
+am oudt off a chob. Dot vill pe allright. I hopes me idt turns out so.
+Undt now, off you like, you could lock der door some. I stay me here
+till somepody gomes der mornin' py."
+
+"Oh! you keep the key, Hans," replied Jack. "You might want to chase out
+after some one; but father told me to warn you not to be tempted to go
+far away. You see, he's storing these cases for a friend, and it seems
+that somebody wants to either get at 'em, or steal them. They're what
+you're hired to protect, Hans. And now let us out, and lock the door
+after we're gone."
+
+Anxious to get to the church before the meeting could be called to order,
+the three scouts did not linger, although Hans was such an amusing little
+man that they would have liked nothing better than to spend an hour in
+his society, listening to stories about his adventures--for the Dutchman
+had roamed pretty much all over the world since his boyhood.
+
+"Shucks! I forgot to examine those boxes," lamented Bobolink, when they
+were on the way past the end of the lumber yard.
+
+Jack was glancing sharply about, wondering whether that tall, skulking
+figure they had glimpsed could be some one who had a peculiar interest in
+the boxes stored in the office of the mill until Professor Hackett called
+for them; or just an ordinary "Weary Willie," looking for a soft board to
+sleep on, before he continued his hike along the railroad track.
+
+But look as he would, he could see no further sign of a trespasser. Of
+course that was no sign the unknown might not be within twenty feet of
+them, right then. The tall piles of lumber offered splendid hiding-places
+if any one was disposed to take advantages of the nooks; Jack had
+explored many a snug hole, when roaming through the yard at various
+times, and ought to know about it.
+
+"Oh! I took care of that part," chuckled Tom Betts. "I saw you were
+talking with Jack and old Hans, so I just stepped up, and walked around
+the boxes. There isn't a thing on 'em but the name of the professor, and
+Jack's dad's address in Stanhope."
+
+"And they didn't look much like animal cages to me," muttered Bobolink;
+upon which both of the others emitted exclamations of surprise, whereupon
+the speaker seemed to think he ought to make some sort of explanation, so
+he went on hastily: "You see, Jack, I somehow got a silly idea in my mind
+that p'raps this little professor was some sort of an animal trainer, and
+meant to come up here, just to have things quiet while he did his little
+stunts. But that was a punk notion for me, all right; there ain't any
+smell of animals about those boxes, not a whiff."
+
+"But what in the wide world gave you that queer notion?" asked Tom.
+
+"Don't know," replied Bobolink, "'less it was what Jack said about
+the professor writing up from Coney Island near New York City; that's
+the place where all the freaks show every summer. I've been down
+there myself."
+
+"Listen to him, would you, Jack, owning up that he's a sure enough freak?
+Well, some of us had a little idea that way, Bobolink, but we never
+thought you'd admit it so coolly," remarked Tom Betts, laughingly.
+
+"And the wild animal show down there is just immense," the other went on,
+not heeding the slur cast upon his reputation; for like many boys,
+Bobolink had a pretty tough skin, and was not easily offended; "and I
+guess I've thought about what I saw done there heaps of times. So Coney
+stands for wild animal trainin' to me. But that guess was away wide of
+the mark. Forget it, fellows. Only whenever Jack here learns what was in
+those boxes, he must let his chums know. It's little enough to pay for
+draggin' a lame scout all the way out here tonight; think so, Jack?"
+
+"I sure do, and you'll have it, if ever I find out," was the reply.
+"Perhaps, after they've been taken away by the professor, my father
+mightn't mind telling me what was in them. And we'll let it rest at
+that, now."
+
+"But you mark me, if Bobolink gets any peace of mind till he learns,"
+warned Tom.
+
+Chatting on various matters connected more or less with the doings of the
+Boy Scout movement, and what a fine thing it was proving for the youth of
+the whole land, Jack and his chums presently brought up at the church
+which had the bell tower; and where a splendid meeting room had been
+given over for their occupancy in the basement, in which a gymnasium was
+fitted up for use in the fall and winter.
+
+In that tower hung a big bell, whose brazen tongue had once upon a time
+alarmed the good people of Stanhope by ding-donging at a most unusual
+hour. It had come through a prank played upon the scouts by several tough
+boys of the town whose enmity Paul Morrison and his chums had been
+unfortunate enough to incur. But for the details of that exciting episode
+the reader will have to be referred back to the preceding volume.
+
+Jack Stormways never glanced up at that tower but that he was forcibly
+reminded of that startling adventure; and a smile would creep over his
+face as he remembered some of the most striking features connected with
+the event.
+
+In the big room the three scouts found quite a crowd awaiting their
+coming. Indeed, it seemed as though nearly every member of the troop had
+made it an especial point to attend this meeting just as though they
+knew there was something unusual about to come before them for
+consideration.
+
+As many of these lads will be apt to figure in the pages of this story,
+it might be just as well to listen to the secretary, as he calls the
+roster of the Stanhope Troop. Once this duty had devolved upon one of the
+original Red Fox Patrol; but with the idea of sharing the
+responsibilities in a more general way, it had been transferred to the
+shoulders of Phil Towns, who belonged to the second patrol.
+
+RED FOX PATROL
+
+1--Paul Morrison, patrol leader, and also assistant scout master.
+2--Jack Stormways.
+3--Bobolink, the official bugler.
+4--Bluff Shipley, the drummer.
+5--Nuthin, whose real name was Albert Cypher.
+6--William Carberry, one of the twins.
+7--Wallace Carberry, the other.
+8--Tom Betts.
+
+GRAY FOX PATROL
+
+1--Jud Elderkin, patrol leader.
+2--Joe Clausin.
+3--Andy Flinn.
+4--Phil Towns.
+5--Horace Poole.
+6--Bob Tice.
+7--Curly Baxter.
+8--Cliff Jones, whose entire name was Clifford Ellsworth Fairfax Jones.
+
+BLACK FOX PATROL
+
+1--Frank Savage, patrol leader.
+2--Billie Little, a very tall lad, and of course always called Little
+Billie.
+3--Nat Smith.
+4--Sandy Griggs.
+5--Old Dan Tucker.
+6--"Red" Conklin.
+7--"Spider" Sexton.
+8--"Gusty" Bellows.
+
+Unattached, but to belong to a fourth patrol, later on:
+
+George Hurst.
+"Lub" Ketcham.
+
+Thus it will be seen that there were now twenty-six lads connected with
+the wide awake Stanhope Troop, and more coming.
+
+After the roll call, they proceeded to the regular business, with Paul
+Morrison in the chair, he being the president of the association. It was
+surprising how well many of these boyish meetings were conducted; Paul
+and some of his comrades knew considerable about parliamentary law, and
+long ago the hilarious members of the troop had learned that when once
+the meeting was called to order they must put all joking aside.
+
+Many a good debate had been heard within those same walls since the
+scouts received permission to meet there; and yet in camp, when the rigid
+discipline was relaxed, these same fellows could be as full of fun and
+frolic as any lads going.
+
+Tonight it had been whispered around that Paul had some sort of
+important communication to make. No one could give a guess as to what it
+might be, although all sorts of hazards were attempted, only to be
+jeered at as absurd.
+
+And so, while the meeting progressed, they were growing more and more
+excited, until finally it was as much as some of them could do to repress
+a cheer when Paul, having made sure that there was no other business to
+be transacted, arose with a smile, and announced that he had a certain
+communication to lay before them.
+
+"Are you ready to hear it?" he asked; "every fellow who is raise
+his hand."
+
+Needless to say, not a single hand remained unraised. Paul deliberately
+counted them to the bitter end.
+
+"Just twenty-four; and as that is the total number present, we'll call it
+unanimous," he said, just to tantalize them a little; and then, with an
+air of business he went on: "Two splendid gentlemen of this town, by name
+Mr. Everett and Colonel Bliss, happen to own motorboats. As they have
+gone to Europe, to be away until late in the Fall, they thought it would
+show how they appreciated the work of the Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts if
+they offered the free use of their two boats to us, to make a cruise
+wherever we thought best during the balance of vacation time. Now, all in
+favor of accepting this magnificent offer from our fellow townsmen
+signify by saying 'aye!'"
+
+Hardly had the words fallen from the speaker's lips when a thunderous
+"aye" made the stout walls of the building tremble.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+FOR CEDAR ISLAND--GHOST OR NO GHOST
+
+
+"Three cheers for Colonel Bliss and Mr. Everett!" called out Bobolink,
+almost too excited to speak plainly.
+
+Paul himself led the cheering, because he knew those delighted boys just
+had to find some sort of outlet for the enthusiasm that was bubbling up
+within them. And doubtless the walls of that sacred building had seldom
+heard such cheers since away back in the time when a meeting was held
+there at news of the Civil War breaking out in 1861 and the patriotic
+citizens had formed a company on the spot, to volunteer their services to
+the President.
+
+"Where will we go?" called out one scout, after the cheering had died
+down, and they found time to consider ways and means of employing the
+motorboats that had been so generously given into their keeping.
+
+"Down the Bushkill to the sea!" suggested one.
+
+"I suppose you think these motorboats can jump like broncos?" declared
+Jud Elderkin, with a look of disgust; "else how would they ever get
+around that big dam down at Seely's Mills? We could crawl a few miles
+_up_ the Bushkill, but to go down would mean only a short cruise."
+
+"Let Paul say!" cried Bobolink, shrewdly reading the smile on the face of
+the assistant scout master, as he listened to all sorts of wild plans,
+none of which would hold together when the rest of the scouts started to
+pick flaws.
+
+"Yes, Paul's got a scheme that'll knock all these wildcat ones just to
+flinders, see if it don't," remarked Tom Betts, waving his hands to
+enforce silence.
+
+"Go on and tell us, Paul; and I reckon I c'n give a right smart guess
+that it's about that Radway River country," declared Bobolink.
+
+"Just what it is," said Paul. "Listen, then, and tell me what you think
+of my plan. I've figured it all out, and believe we could make it a go.
+If we did, we'd surely have the time of our lives, and find out something
+that I've wanted myself to know a long while back. It's about a trip up
+the Radway River, too, just as our smart chum guessed."
+
+"But, say, the boats are right here at Stanhope, and have been used in
+running up and down the Bushkill; then how in the name of wonder can we
+carry them over to the Radway, which is some miles away, I take it?"
+asked William Carberry, soberly.
+
+"Wait and see; Paul's got all that arranged," declared the confident
+Tom Betts.
+
+"Have 'em hauled over on one of his father's big lumber wagons, mebbe,"
+suggested Nuthin, who was rather a small chap, though not of quite so
+little importance as his name would seem to indicate.
+
+"Oh, you make me tired, Nuthin," declared Bobolink; "why, those
+motorboats weigh a ton or two apiece. Think of gettin' a wagon strong
+enough to carry one; and all the slow trips it'd have to take to get 'em
+there and back. I reckon the whole of our vacation'd see us on the dry
+land part of the cruise. Now, let Paul tell us what plan he's been
+thinking about to get over to the Radway with 'em."
+
+"Well, it's just this way," the chairman of the meeting went on to say,
+calmly, with the air of one who had studied the matter carefully, and
+grasped every little detail; "most of you know that there was a stream
+known as Jackson Creek that ran into the Bushkill a mile below
+Manchester. That was once dredged out, and made to form a regular canal
+connecting the two rivers. For years, my father says, it was used
+regularly by all sorts of boats that wanted to cross over from one
+river to the other. But changes came, and by degrees the old canal has
+been about forgotten. Still, it's there; and I went through it in my
+canoe just yesterday, to sound, and see if it could be used by the
+motorboats now."
+
+"And could it?" asked Bobolink, eagerly.
+
+"I think there's a fair chance that we'd pull through, though it might
+sometimes be a close shave. There's a lot of nasty mud in the canal,
+because, you see, it hasn't been cleaned out for years. If we had a good
+rain now, and both rivers raised, we wouldn't have any trouble, but could
+run through easy enough."
+
+"Well, supposing we did get through, how far up the Radway would we
+push?" asked Bobolink, determined to get the entire proposition out of
+Paul at once, now that they had him going.
+
+"All the way to Lake Tokala," replied Paul, promptly. "Some of you happen
+to know that there's a jolly island in that big lake, known as Cedar
+Island, because right on top of a small hill in the middle, a splendid
+cedar stands. Well, we could take our tents along, and make camp on that
+island, fishing, swimming, and having one of the best times ever heard
+of. What do you say, fellows?"
+
+Immediately there was a clamor of tongues. Some seemed to be for
+accepting Paul's suggestion with a whoop, and declared that it took them
+by storm. A few, however, seemed to raise objections; and such was the
+racket that nobody was able to make himself understood. So the chairman
+called for order; and with the whack of his gavel on the table every
+voice was stilled.
+
+"Let's conduct this meeting in a parliamentary way," said Paul. "Some of
+you must have thought it stood adjourned. Now, whoever wants to speak,
+get up, and let's hear what you've got to say."
+
+"I move that we take up the plan offered, and make our headquarters on
+Cedar Island," said Wallace Carberry, rising.
+
+"Not on your life!" declared Curly Baxter, bobbing up like a
+jack-in-the-box; "I've heard lots about that same place. It's troubled
+with a _mystery_, and only last week I heard Paddy Reilly say he'd never
+go there fishin' again if he was paid for it. He's dreadfully afraid of
+ghosts, Paddy is."
+
+"Ghosts!" almost shouted William Carberry; "I vote to go to Cedar
+Island then. I've always wanted to see a genuine ghost, and never yet
+had a chance."
+
+"Now, I heard that it was a wild man that lived somewhere on that same
+island," remarked Frank Savage. "They say he's a terror, too, all covered
+with hair; and one man who'd been looking for pearl mussels in the river
+up that way told my father he beat any Wild Man of Borneo he'd ever set
+eyes on in a freak show or circus."
+
+"Oh, that's a fine place for honest scouts to pitch their tents, ain't
+it--I don't think!" observed Joe Clausin, with a sneer.
+
+"H-h-huh! ain't there j-j-just twenty-six of us s-s-scouts; and ought we
+b-b-be afraid of one l-l-little g-g-ghost, or even a w-w-wild man?"
+demanded Bluff Shipley, who stuttered once in a while, when unduly
+excited, though he was by degrees overcoming the nervous habit.
+
+"Put it to a vote, Mr. Chairman!" called out Bobolink.
+
+"Yes, and majority rules, remember," warned William Carberry.
+
+"But that don't mean a feller just _has_ to go along, does it?" asked
+Nuthin, looking somewhat aghast at the thought.
+
+"Of course it don't;" Bobolink told him; "all the same you'll be on deck,
+my boy. I just know you can't resist having such a jolly good time, ghost
+or not. Question, Mr. Chairman!"
+
+"Vote! Vote!"
+
+"All in favor of trying to go through the old canal that used to connect
+the Bushkill with the Radway, and cruising up to Cedar Island, camping
+there for a week or ten days, say 'aye,'" Paul went on to remark.
+
+A thunderous response cheered his heart; for somehow Paul seemed very
+much set upon following out the scheme he himself had devised.
+
+"Contrary, no!" he continued.
+
+There were just three who boldly allowed themselves to be set down as not
+being in favor of the daring plan--Nuthin, Curly Baxter and Joe Clausin;
+and yet, just as the wise, far-seeing Bobolink had declared, when it came
+to a question of staying at home while the rest of the troop were off
+enjoying their vacation, or swallowing their fear of ghosts and wild men,
+these three boys would be along when the motorboats started on their
+adventurous cruise.
+
+"The ayes have it; and the meeting stands adjourned, according to the
+motion I can see Jack Stormways's just about to put," and with a laugh
+Paul stepped down from the platform.
+
+For fully half an hour they talked the thing over. It was viewed from
+every possible angle. Many objections raised by the doubters were
+promptly met by the ready Paul; and in the end it was definitely decided
+that they would give just one day to making all needed preparations.
+
+They had tents for the three patrols now, and all sorts of cooking
+utensils; for frequently the scouts were divided into messes, there being
+a cook appointed in each patrol.
+
+What was needed most of all were the supplies for an extended stay; and
+when it was taken into consideration that a score of boys, with ravenous
+appetites, would want three big meals each and every day, the question of
+figuring out enough provisions to see them through was no light matter.
+
+But then they had considerable money in the treasury, and a numbers of
+the boys said they would bring loaves of bread, and all sorts of eatables
+from home; so Paul saw his way clear toward providing the given quantity.
+
+"Don't forget that the gasoline is going to eat a big hole into our
+little pile of the long green," remarked Curly Baxter, still engaged in
+trying to throw cold water on the scheme.
+
+"Oh, that makes me think of something I forgot to tell you, fellows,"
+declared Paul, his face filled with good humor. "One of the stipulations
+connected with the lending of these two motor-boats by the kind gentlemen
+who own them was that they insisted on supplying all the liquid fuel
+needed to run the craft. The tanks are to be filled, and each boat
+carries in addition another drum, with extra gasoline. We'll likely have
+enough for all our needs that way, and without costing us a red cent,
+either. So, you see how easy most of your objections melt away, Curly.
+Chances are, you'll fall into line, and be with us when we start the day
+after tomorrow."
+
+Several of the boys were feeling pretty blue. They wanted to accompany
+the rest of the troop the worst way; but it happened that their folks had
+planned to go down to the sea-shore for a month, until school began
+again; and the chances were they would have to go along, though every one
+of them declared they would choose the cruise up the Radway in the two
+motorboats, if given their way.
+
+But it looked as though there was going to be a pretty fair crowd on each
+boat. Paul counted noses of those he believed would be along, and found
+that they seemed to number eighteen. If two of the three timid ones
+concluded to throw their fears to the winds, and come along, it would
+make an even twenty.
+
+"Of course, it will be hard to sleep so many aboard, because the boats
+are small affairs, taken altogether," Paul observed; "but we hope to make
+the journey in a full day, and be on Cedar Island by nightfall."
+
+"Whew! night on Cedar Island--excuse _me_ if you please!" faltered Curly
+Baxter, holding up both hands, as though the idea suggested all sorts of
+terrible things to his mind; but much as he seemed desirous of causing
+others to back out, Paul saw no signs of any one doing so.
+
+"Meet here at noon tomorrow, boys, and I'll report what I've done. Then
+we can figure on what else we have to lay in store, so as to be
+comfortable. We must get everything down to the boats before evening,
+because we start early on Wednesday, you hear. At eight A. M., Bobolink,
+here, will sound his bugle; and ten minutes later we weigh anchor, or cut
+loose our hawsers, as you choose to say it, for it means letting go a
+rope after all."
+
+They started home in bunches, as usual, those who happened to live near
+together naturally waiting for each other. Paul, Jack, and Bobolink
+walked together.
+
+"And just as it happens so many times," Paul was saying, as they
+sauntered on in the direction of home. "Mr. Gordon is away on the road
+somewhere, selling goods; so we have to go without having our fine
+scoutmaster along to look after us."
+
+"Guess nobody will miss him very much, although Mr. Gordon is a mighty
+nice man and we all think a heap of him; but you are able to fill his
+shoes all right, Paul; and, somehow, it seems to feel better not to have
+any grown-up along. The responsibility makes most of the fellers behave,
+and think for themselves, you see," Jack went on to say.
+
+Paul heaved a little sigh, for he knew who shouldered most of that same
+responsibility.
+
+"But," remarked Bobolink, as he was about to separate from Jack and Paul
+on a certain corner, where their ways divided; "I'd give something right
+now to just know what's in those queer old boxes Professor Hackett has
+stored in your mill, Jack; and why they have to be watched, just like
+they held money or something that has to be guarded against an unknown
+enemy! But I guess I'll have to take it out in wantin', because you don't
+know, and wouldn't tell till you got the consent of your dad, even if you
+did. Goodnight, fellows; and here's hoping we're going to have the time
+of our lives up and around Cedar Island!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+LAYING IN THE STORES
+
+
+Well, it was a busy day for the scouts of Stanhope Troop.
+
+There was the greatest running back and forth, and consultations among
+the lads, ever known. Where a parent seemed doubtful about giving
+permission for a boy to take part in the intended cruise, influence was
+brought to bear on coaxing neighbors to drop in, and tell how glad they
+were their boys were independent, as it was the finest thing that could
+ever come to them; and also what slight chances there seemed to be of any
+accident happening that might not occur when the lads stayed at home,
+where they would go in swimming anyhow.
+
+And owing to the masterly way in which the objections of certain parents
+were met and overcome, long before noon every boy who had a ghost of a
+chance of sailing on the two motor-boats reported that he had gained
+consent; even Curly Baxter admitted that his folks had been won over,
+and that he "could go along, if so he he chose to shut his eyes to facts,
+and just trust to luck," which, be it said, he finally did, just as Paul
+had believed would be the case.
+
+Meanwhile Paul and Jack were making their purchases of provisions, using
+a list that had been found useful on their other camping trip; although
+several little inaccuracies were corrected. For instance, they had taken
+too much rice on that other occasion; and not enough ham, and salt pork,
+and breakfast bacon.
+
+Eggs they hoped to buy from some farmer over on the mainland; and
+possibly milk as well. Jack even hinted that they might feel disposed, if
+the money held out, to get a few chickens, and have one grand feed before
+breaking camp.
+
+"And this time we'll try and make sure that none of our grub is hooked,
+like it was when we camped up on old Rattlesnake Mountain," Jack had
+declared, with emphasis, for the memory of certain mysterious things
+that had happened to them on that occasion often arose to disturb some
+of the scouts.
+
+"Oh! it ought to be easy to look out for that part of the job," Paul had
+made answer; "because, you see, we'll have the two boats to store things
+in, and they can be anchored out in the lake, if we want, each with a
+guard aboard."
+
+By noon the whole town knew all about the expected cruise. Boys who did
+not have the good luck to belong to Stanhope Troop became greatly excited
+over it; and by their actions and looks showed how envious they were of
+their schoolmates.
+
+Just about then, if the assistant scout master had called for volunteers,
+he could have filled two complete additional patrols with candidates; for
+the fellows began to realize that the scouts were having three times as
+much fun as any one else.
+
+But Paul was too wise for that. He believed in selecting the right sort
+of boys, and not taking every one who offered his name, just because he
+wanted to have a good time. These fellows would not be able to live up to
+the iron-clad rules that scouts have got to subscribe to, and which are
+pretty much covered in the twelve cardinal principles which, each boy
+declares in the beginning, he will try and govern his life by--"to be
+trustworthy, loyal, helpful, friendly, courteous, kind, obedient,
+cheerful, thrifty, brave, clean, and reverent."
+
+Some of the scouts were at Headquarters, as the room under the church was
+called, getting the supplies there in order, to take down to the boats
+later on, when they were surprised to have a visitor in the shape of old
+Peleg Growdy.
+
+This man lived just outside the town limits, on the main road. He had
+once kept his wagon yard in a very disgraceful condition, much to the
+disgust of the women folks of Stanhope. The boys, too, looked upon Peleg
+as a crusty old fellow, who hated their kind.
+
+He had done something to offend one of the scouts, and it was proposed
+that they play some sort of trick on the old fellow in order to pay him
+back; but Paul ventured to say that if the scouts went in a body to his
+place, when he was asleep, and cleaned up his wagon yard so that it
+looked neat, he would have his eyes opened to the debt he owed the
+community.
+
+Paul, it seemed, had learned the main cause of the old man's holding
+aloof from his neighbors. It came from the fact that some years back he
+had lost his wife and children in the burning of his house; and ever
+since had looked upon boys as especially created to worry lone widowers
+who wanted only to be let alone.
+
+Well, the scouts certainly made a great friend of Peleg Growdy. He had
+even tried to induce them to let him purchase their suits to show that he
+was a changed man; but of course they could not allow that, because each
+true scout must earn every cent of the money with which his outfit in the
+beginning is bought. But in many ways had old Peleg shown them that he
+was now going to be one of the best friends the boys of Stanhope Troop
+had ever possessed.
+
+He had heard about their intended trip, when he came to town with some
+produce; and rather than go back home with some things for which there
+did not seem to be any sale at the price he wanted, he had come around
+with his wagon to ask his boy friends to please him by accepting them as
+his contribution to the cause.
+
+They could not disappoint the generous-hearted old man by refusing; and
+besides the half-bushel of onions, and double the quantity of new
+potatoes, looked mighty fine to the lads.
+
+About two o'clock, when it seemed that their list was about complete,
+even though they would doubtless think of a lot of things after it was
+too late to get them, Paul decided to send for the wagon that was to haul
+the tents and other things, including blankets for the crowd, brought
+from various homes to the meeting place, down to the waiting boats.
+
+"I wanted to get Ezra Sexton, but he was busy," Jack explained, when he
+had carried out the errand given into his charge; "fact is, I hear,
+Bobolink, that Ezra came early this morning with an order from the
+professor, and took all those big cases away in his two wagons."
+
+"Well, that was quick work now, wasn't it?" grumbled Bobolink; "reckon I
+won't ever have a chance to see what was inside those boxes. Say, see
+here, d'ye happen to know where Ezra hauled 'em? Not to the railroad, I
+should think, because they only came that way yesterday."
+
+But Jack shook his head.
+
+"Some distance off, I reckon, because the trucks don't seem to be back
+yet, so I couldn't get to see Ezra," he remarked; "but when we come home
+again, I'll ask my father about it, and relieve that curiosity of yours,
+Bobolink."
+
+"Huh! that means mebbe two weeks or so I'm to go on guessing, I s'pose,"
+the other remarked, in a disconsolate way that made Jack laugh.
+
+"Funny how you do get a notion in that coco of yours; and it'd take a
+crowbar to work it loose," he observed, at which the other only
+grinned, saying:
+
+"Born that way; must 'a made a mistake and left the wrong article at our
+house for the new baby; thought it was a girl; always wantin' to know
+everything, and never happy till I get it. But Jack, I'll try and keep
+this matter out of my mind. Don't pay any attention to me, if I look
+cross once in a while. That'll be when it's got me gripped fast, and I'm
+tryin' to guess."
+
+"I've known you to do the same when you had one of those puzzles, trying
+to work it," chuckled Jack Stormways. "Fact is, I remember that once you
+told me you sat up till two o'clock in the morning over that ring
+business."
+
+"But I got her, Jack--remember that; won't you? If I hadn't I'd been
+burning the midnight oil yet, I reckon. 'Taint safe to make _me_ a
+present of a puzzle, because I'm just dead sure to nearly split my poor
+weak brain trying to figger it out. And Jack, I'll never be happy till I
+know what was in those boxes; and why did that sly little professor
+believe someone wanted to steal his thunder and lightning?"
+
+It took several loads to carry all their traps down to the boats. But
+finally, as the groceries had also been delivered, the scouts took count
+of their stock, and it was believed they had about everything, save what
+the boys might bring in the morning from home.
+
+Paul advised them to go slow with regard to what they carried along, as
+they did not expect to be gone six months. If any garments gave out, why,
+there would be plenty of soap and water handy; and the fellow who did not
+know how to wash a pair of socks, or some handkerchiefs, had better take
+a few lessons on how to play laundry woman in an emergency.
+
+"If things keep on multiplying much more," the scout master remarked, as
+he looked around at the tremendous amount of stuff which the boys were
+now beginning to stow away systematically; "why we won't be able to
+navigate the boats through that shallow canal at all. They'll just stick
+fast, because they'll be so low down in the water; and chances are we'll
+have to spend all our vacation slobbering around in that mud trying to
+coax them along. Go slow, fellows; bring just as little as you possibly
+can in the morning. If there's any doubt about it being a real necessity,
+why leave it at home. We're all scouts and true comrades, ready to share
+and share alike; so, no matter what happens, no one will go without."
+
+Of course there were many persons who came down to watch the loading of
+the supplies, for half of Stanhope was interested in the expedition; and
+groups of envious boys could be seen in various nooks, taking note of all
+that went on, while they wished they had such good luck.
+
+No one was allowed on board who had no business there. Of course when any
+of the fathers or mothers of the boys who were going happened along, they
+were only too proudly shown through both boats, and had everything
+explained by half a dozen eager scouts. But a couple of guards stood at
+the gangplank, and no boy was allowed aboard unless accompanied by his
+parents; and even then a strict watch was kept, because there were some
+pretty mean fellows in town, who believed in the motto of "rule or
+ruin." When they were not allowed to play, they always tried their best
+to see to it that no one else played, either.
+
+"There's Ted Slavin and Ward Kenwood sitting up on the bank over there,
+Paul," remarked Jack, about half an hour before the time when the scouts
+would have to be going home to their suppers.
+
+"I've been watching them," replied the scout master; "and from the way
+they carry on, laughing when they put their heads together, I had just
+about made up my mind that they were hatching up some mischief."
+
+"Mischief!" echoed Bobolink, who was close by at the moment, and heard
+what was being said; "say, that's too nice a word to use when talking
+about the pranks of that combination. Ward, he supplies some of the
+brains, and all of the hard plunks; while that bully, Ted Slavin, does
+the work, or gets some of his cronies to do it for him. Now, I wonder if
+they'll try to come aboard here, and play hob with our stuff, like they
+did once before when we were all ready to hike off on a jaunt?"
+
+"Don't bother yourself about that, Bobolink," said Paul, quietly. "I had
+decided, even before I noticed Ward and Ted, that we must have a guard
+stay on board all night. I'm going to see right now what fellows can be
+spared. They can go home to supper, and some of us will wait for them to
+come back."
+
+"Let me be one, Paul; won't you?" pleaded Bobolink.
+
+"But you are so quick to act, and it might bring on trouble," objected
+the other.
+
+"Oh! I'll promise to think five times before I act once; and besides,
+there'll be some fellow along, like Jack here, who can keep me quiet. Of
+course, though, if you believe I'm not fit to do the work, why--"
+
+"That'll do for you, Bobolink," Paul broke in, "if your folks say you can
+stay, come back ready to camp on board. I'll find you one or two
+mates--four if possible--so you can sleep in relays of twos. And I'll
+also try to fix up some dodge that will cool those fellows off, in case
+they try to jump aboard between sunset and daylight."
+
+"Huh! I'd rather _warm_ their jackets for 'em," growled Bobolink; who,
+having suffered before at the hands of the meanest boy in Stanhope, Ted
+Slavin, had only the poorest opinion of him, and of those who trained in
+his company.
+
+"When I come back tonight, after supper," continued Paul, "I'm going to
+fetch my shotgun along. It might come in handy on the cruise in case we
+ran up against a wildcat, or something like that. And I've known such a
+thing as a double-barrel to be mighty useful, when fired in the air, to
+make sneaking boys nearly jump out of their skins with alarm--but always
+in the air, remember, Bobolink."
+
+"Oh! don't worry about me; my bite is not half as bad as my bark. I like
+to make out I'm just fierce, when all the while, if you could look
+inside, you'd find me chuckling to beat the band. I wouldn't shoot a gun
+at anybody, unless it was to save another fellow's life; and then I'd try
+to pepper his legs. Fetch the gun, Paul; it'll come in real handy."
+
+So, when Paul did come back after dark, he carried the weapon under his
+arm in true hunter style; for Paul had been several times up in Maine,
+and knew a good deal of woodcraft, having had actual experience, which is
+better than theory, any day.
+
+These four scouts were left in charge of the two boats, when finally Paul
+went back home to get some sleep before the eventful day that was to
+witness the sailing of the motorboat expedition:
+
+Bobolink; Tom Betts; Spider Sexton, of the Black Fox Patrol and Andy
+Flinn, who belonged to the Gray Foxes; and firmly did they promise Paul
+to keep a bright lookout to make sure that no harm came to the boats
+during the long night.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+JUST AFTER THE CLOCK STRUCK TEN
+
+
+"Here we are, monarchs of all we survey," remarked Bobolink, as the last
+of the other scouts went off, leaving the four guards to their task of
+taking care of those two fine motorboats for the night.
+
+It was nine o'clock.
+
+The well-known sounds from the church steeple had told them that; and
+somehow every fellow counted the strokes aloud, as though on this night
+in particular they meant far more than at other times.
+
+Stanhope, not being a manufacturing town, like Manchester, was, as a
+rule, rather quiet of nights; except when the Glorious Fourth was being
+celebrated; or some other holiday kept the younger element on the move.
+
+Bobolink had been given the post of "Captain of the Guards;" while Tom
+Betts was to be considered the second in command. They were to divide the
+duties in such fashion that there would be two of them on deck at a time.
+
+"I'll take Andy for my mate; and you can have Spider to help out,"
+Bobolink had told Tom, when they were arranging the programme.
+
+"And how long will the watches be?" demanded Spider, who liked to sleep
+about as much as any fellow in the troop; he had gained that odd name not
+because he was artful and cruel; but on account of his slender legs,
+which long ago some smart boy had likened to those of a spider; and it
+only requires a hint like that to establish a nick-name.
+
+"Two hours each, divided into four," replied the chief, feeling the
+responsibility of his position; for this was really the first time
+Bobolink could remember being placed over any of his fellow scouts--Paul
+wished to "try him out," and discover what sort of reliance could be
+placed in the lad.
+
+"That's an awful short time to get a snooze," complained Spider, yawning.
+"Why, you'd hardly get asleep before you'd have to wake up."
+
+"Then what's the use going to sleep at all, at all?" remarked Andy
+Flinn, with a broad smile. "Let's draw lots to say who'll stand guard
+the whole night"
+
+"Well, I guess not," objected Spider, vigorously. "Half a loaf is some
+better'n no bread, they always say; and four hours ought to make a
+fellow feel as though he hadn't been shut out altogether from his
+needed rest."
+
+"Needed rest is good for you, Spider; the only trouble is you need too
+much," Bobolink remarked. "But here's the way we'll fix it: Andy and me,
+why, we'll be the pioneers on the job, starting in right now, while you
+others curl up somewhere, and get busy taking your forty winks. At
+eleven-ten we'll give you the foot, and take your places. Jack left me
+his little watch, so we could tell how time goes; but sure, you can hear
+the clock in the church steeple knock off the hours. And for the last
+time, listen to me; not one wink must any sentry take while on duty.
+Sleeping on post is the most terrible thing you can do. They shoot
+soldiers in war time who betray their trust that way. Get your
+instructions, fellows?"
+
+"I'm on to what you mean, all right," said Spider; "and I guess I know my
+weakness, as well as anybody. To prove that I want to do the right thing,
+I'm going to fix it up with my mate to give me a jab with this pin, every
+time he gets a notion in his head that I'm drowsing."
+
+"Say, that sounds heroic all right," remarked Bobolink, doubtfully; "but
+you don't want to get too gay with that same pin, Tom. It'd be a shame to
+wake Andy and me up every ten minutes, making Spider give a yelp. Better
+just shake him if he acts sleepy. And above everything else, keep a
+bright watch along the shore."
+
+"Think they'll be apt to come from that direction, do you?" asked Spider.
+
+"Just as like as not," the other returned; "but that isn't saying you
+ought not to keep an eye on the other side, and all around. I wouldn't
+put it past that Ted Slavin to swim down this way from some place above,
+thinking he could do his little trick by fooling us, and coming aboard on
+the water side."
+
+"Whew! do you really think, then, he'd dare board these boats, knowing
+that they belong to two of the richest and most prominent citizens of
+Stanhope?" asked Spider, who occasionally liked to air his command of
+fine language.
+
+"Well, you ought to be on to the curves of that Ted Slavin; and if you
+just look back to things he's been known to do in the past, why, lots
+of times he's played his pranks on people that had a pull. Why, didn't
+he even sneak into the loft over Police Headquarters once, and rig up a
+scare that came near breaking up the force. Ted fixed it so the wind'd
+work through a knot-hole in the dark, whenever he chose to pull a
+string over the fence back of the house, and make the awfullest
+groaning noise anybody ever did hear. It got on the nerves of Chief
+Billings and his men. They hunted that loft over and over, but of
+course the groans didn't come when they were up there. Why, he had 'em
+so badly rattled that they all just about camped out on the pavement
+the rest of that night."
+
+"Sure, I remember that," declared Andy Flinn, laughing. "Three nights did
+he play the same joke, and then they got on to him. Wan officer do be
+sneakin' up to the loft, while the rist pretended to be huntin' around
+downstairs. He discovered the sthring, cript downstairs again, wint out
+on the sly, and, be the powers, followed it to the fince. Then he wint
+around, and jumped on Tid while the bhoy was a pullin' his sthring like
+smoke, makin' worse groanings than any time yit. Sure they thried to hush
+the joke up, the police was that ashamed; but it cript out some way."
+
+"Well, get off to bed, Spider and Tom;" said Bobolink, "we'll wake you up
+when it's time to change the watch. And remember what a nice little
+surprise we've got ready for anybody who thinks he can meddle with things
+that don't belong to him. Skip out now, both of you."
+
+The two motorboats had been lashed side by side. They were about of a
+size, and something like twenty-four feet in length, with a rather
+generous beam, because their owners went in for pleasure and comfort,
+rather than racing. Still, one of the boats, the _Speedwell_, was said to
+be capable of doing a mile in seven minutes, if pushed, on flat water;
+while the other, called the _Comfort_, being broader, could not do
+anything like that.
+
+It was easy to pass from one boat to the other, as they lay there. Each
+had a canopy top, and curtains that could be dropped, and buttoned,
+during a wet spell, or if the owner chose to sleep aboard; but on this
+occasion Paul had believed it best that these latter should remain up, so
+as to allow of free observation all around.
+
+A stout hawser secured the boat nearest the shore to a big stake that
+had been driven deeply into the earth. Thus the boats lay close beside
+a short dock that was called a landing stage. As the current of the
+Bushkill was always pretty strong there must be more or less of a
+strain on that hawser; but since it was comparatively new, the boys
+felt that there could not be the slightest danger of its breaking,
+unless some outside influence were brought to bear on it, such as a
+keen-edged knife blade.
+
+In that case, as it was very taut, it would naturally part readily; and
+with consequences disastrous to the safety of the two boats, which must
+be carried off down-stream in the darkness, possibly to be driven ashore
+on some rocks below.
+
+And so Bobolink, having been duly warned with regard to possible trouble
+in connection with that same hawser, had mentally called the rope his
+"dead line;" and he watched the shore above that point three times as
+much as any other place.
+
+He and Andy had planned not to talk while on duty. If they found it
+necessary to say anything at all, which was hardly likely, the
+communication would be in the lowest whisper.
+
+Bobolink was not greedy, but he really hoped that if any sort of
+trouble did come it would come along while he and Andy were holding the
+post of guards. He had a little fear that Spider Sexton might not be
+depended on, no matter what his good intentions, while Tom Betts was an
+unknown quantity.
+
+In case Andy happened to be sitting in one boat, while Bobolink was
+occupying the other, they had fixed it up so that by taking a lead
+pencil, the "commander" could give a few little light taps on the side of
+the craft, using his knowledge of the Morse code to send the message, and
+in this way ask whether his assistant were wide awake, and on the job,
+when Andy would send back a reply along the same order; for he aspired to
+be a signal man of the troop, and was daily practicing with the wigwag
+flags, as well as smoke and fire signals.
+
+The town clock boomed out the hour of ten.
+
+Bobolink had himself begun to feel rather sleepy, and more to arouse his
+dormant faculties than anything else, he sent a message along the wooden
+telegraph line. The reply was a bit slow in coming, which made him think
+Andy might also be inclined to fall into a doze.
+
+So Bobolink decided that he must bestir himself, and give the signal more
+frequently. He would not have this, his first important commission, turn
+out poorly, for a good deal. Perhaps his whole future usefulness as a
+scout who could be depended on in emergencies rested on the way he
+accounted for the safety of the motorboats this night.
+
+When he found himself letting his eyes shut, even for a minute, he would
+immediately try to picture the consternation that would ensue should a
+fire suddenly envelope the boats that had been placed in the hands of the
+scouts, and for which they would be held responsible.
+
+He knew Ted Slavin of old, and felt that the town bully would not
+hesitate at even such a thing as that.
+
+Then there was such a thing as cutting the hawser, and letting the boats
+drift down-stream, to bring up against some rocks that might stave a hole
+in the delicate planking. Who could tell but what the rope had parted
+under a strain? Sometimes a break may look like the work of a sharp
+knife; and anyway, as darkness lay upon the scene, with a cloudy sky
+overhead to hide the young moon, the identity of the vandal could never
+be absolutely known.
+
+All these things Bobolink was turning over and over in his mind as he sat
+there trying to keep awake.
+
+It is one of the hardest things to do, and especially when the subject is
+only a half-grown lad, with but a dim idea of the responsibility
+depending on the faithful discharge of his duty.
+
+Hello! what was that? Bobolink thought he surely heard a sound like
+muttered conversation. But then, even in steady old Stanhope, there were
+a number of happy-go-lucky chaps who tarried late in the saloons; and
+when they finally started homeward, used to talk to themselves along the
+way. Perhaps it was only one of these convivial fellows trying to find
+the way home, and getting off his course, coming to the open place along
+the river bank, intending to lie down and sleep his confusion off.
+
+Bobolink was thrilled, however, a minute later, when he felt sure he
+could again hear the low mutter of voices. It struck him that several
+persons might be urging each other on, as though inclined to feel the
+need of backing.
+
+It came from up-river, too, the point he meant to watch more than any
+other; and this fact increased the suspicious look of the case.
+
+"Oh! it's coming," whispered the eager boy to himself; "and I only hope
+the water will be hot enough, that's all."
+
+His words were mysterious enough to suit any one; and even while he was
+speaking in this manner Bobolink started to crawl under the canopy that
+sheltered him from the dew of the night. He allowed the end of his pencil
+to throb against the side of the boat, giving the one significant word:
+"Come!" An immediate answer assured him that Andy heard, and understood.
+Another minute, and the Irish boy came shuffling over from the other
+boat, trying to keep from making any more noise than was necessary.
+
+"Take hold," Bobolink whispered in his ear, pulling the other's head down
+close to his lips; "They're coming! Be ready to go at it licketty-split
+when I say the word. Get that?"
+
+"Sure!" came in the faintest tone from the other; whereupon Bobolink,
+feeling that his hour had arrived, started once more to crawl back to his
+former position.
+
+But now he had something in his hands that looked very like a snake; or
+since Bobolink was known to fairly detest all crawling creatures, it
+might be a rope, although there are still other things that have that
+same willowy appearance--a garden hose, for example.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE GREAT CRUISE OF THE SCOUTS BEGUN
+
+
+When Bobolink again reached the bow of the _Comfort_, and peered above
+the side, he glued his eyes to the spot where he knew the rope lay that
+held the boats moored to the shore.
+
+And as the half moon condescended to peep from behind the dark clouds
+that had until now hidden her bright face, the scout could make out a
+flattened figure, that seemed to be hugging the earth, while creeping
+slowly forward.
+
+Not only one, but three more, did he see, all in a line, as though in
+this way the conspirators had arranged to keep their courage up to the
+sticking point. Each fellow might watch his mates, and see that no one
+lagged behind.
+
+Bobolink was quivering with eagerness and excitement. He figured that
+these night crawlers had only five more feet to cover before they would
+be as close to his "dead line" as prudence would dictate that he allow,
+since it might require only a single sweep of the knife to cut that rope.
+
+They kept on advancing as though anxious to get the job over with, now
+that they had keyed their courage up to the proper pitch.
+
+Another foot was all that Bobolink meant to allow, and then his time
+would come to act. Those last few seconds seemed fairly to crawl, so
+wrought-up was the waiting scout; but finally he concluded that it was no
+use holding off any longer. So he suddenly called out the one word:
+
+"Now!"
+
+Instantly a new sound broke the silence. Bobolink elevated the object
+he was hold in his hands. There came a queer, whizzing noise, like
+water squirting from the end of a nozzle; which was exactly what it
+was, and _hot_ water in the bargain, not actually scalding, but of such
+a temperature to make a fellow wince, if it happened to sprinkle
+over-his face.
+
+It was all Bobolink's idea. He had brought a little garden pump aboard
+during the afternoon, with the hose that went with it. There was a
+kerosene cookstove aboard each boat, used when going ashore might be
+unwise on account of rainy weather; and on this the artful schemer had
+heated his water. Every time he went back to that quarter he tested its
+temperature, to see whether it kept up to the pitch he meant it should
+be. And Andy's part of the job was to manipulate the handle of the little
+pump with all his vim and power.
+
+Imagine the consternation of four plotters, who, when just about to
+carry out their pleasant little scheme, suddenly and without warning,
+found a spray of hot water touching every exposed part of their skin!
+
+Do you wonder that they immediately let out a few yelps, and scrambling
+to their feet, rushed headlong away, followed by the laughter and jeers
+of Bobolink and his hard-working assistant.
+
+"Go it, you tigers! My! what sprinters you can be, when you only half
+try! Come again, when you cool off a bit! Plenty more of the same kind on
+tap! Don't be bashful, Teddy; let's hear from you again, and often. Whee!
+just listen to 'em howl, would you?"
+
+Perhaps some of those who were with Ted Slavin in his little game were
+more frightened than hurt by the hot water, but they certainly did
+chatter as they kept on up the river bank. Little danger of them making
+another try to injure the boats again that night!
+
+Of course Spider and Tom Bates had jumped up at the first outbreak, ready
+to help repel boarders. Their assistance was not needed; but they enjoyed
+the joke as much as their chums and for the next half hour all sat
+around, talking, and comparing notes.
+
+But finally silence again rested over the scene; Spider and Tom
+condescended to crawl under their blankets again for another "cat-nap,"
+as the former dubbed it, while Bobolink and his able assistant resumed
+their duties as sentries.
+
+The night, however, was disturbed no more by any outbreak. Those would-be
+jokers seemed to know when they had taken hold of what Bobolink termed
+the "business end of a buzz-saw;" at any rate they were only conspicuous
+during the remainder of the night by their absence.
+
+Of course every one of the boys on board the two motorboats was glad when
+the first peep of dawn came. It had seemed about "forty-eleven hours
+long," Spider admitted; though he also triumphantly asked Tom Betts
+whether the other had had occasion to jab that pin into him even once,
+which the second scout laughingly admitted he had not.
+
+"See there," Spider had declared, "can't I keep awake when duty
+calls me? You needn't be afraid to trust a Sexton, when you need a
+faithful watcher."
+
+Before the sun appeared Paul and Jack were on hand, to make sure that
+everything was in shape for an early start, for they hoped to get away by
+nine o'clock.
+
+Others of the scouts began to drop around, and from the appearance of
+their eyes Paul was of the opinion that a full night's sleep had not been
+enjoyed by many of the members of the troop. Of course, it was the
+excitement of starting out on such a glorious cruise that kept them
+awake; for it is not given to scouts very often to enjoy such a prospect,
+afloat, with staunch motorboats given over into their keeping.
+
+Since so many things had been looked after on the preceding afternoon,
+there was really little to be done that morning. Every fellow was
+supposed to be on hand at a certain time, ready with his little blanket,
+and his haversack, in which he would carry a towel, some soap, a brush,
+an extra shirt, some socks and handkerchiefs; and if he could find a
+spare bit of room, why, he was entitled to cram in all the crullers or
+other dainties he could manage; for after that supply was gone there
+would be only plain camp fare until they got home again.
+
+Paul was kept busy seeing that everything was stored away in the right
+place. Of course the supplies of food and the tents, as well as the
+numerous blankets, had to be divided as equally as possible, so that each
+boat would have its fair cargo.
+
+When the roster of those who could go was taken, just before the time
+came to start, and the others were ordered ashore, it was found that all
+told there were just eighteen fellows lucky enough to be in the lot.
+
+Some of the boys who could not go looked pretty doleful as they watched
+the preparations. There were the twins, William and Wallace Carberry,
+whose parents insisted on their going to the sea-shore; and Horace Poole,
+as well as Cliff Jones, of the second patrol, also compelled to obey the
+parental injunction; when, if given their choice, they would ten times
+sooner have remained at home, and had the chance of starting out on this
+wonderful cruise with their chums.
+
+Sandy Griggs, the butcher's son, was laid up with a lame leg; while
+George Hurst happened to develop a touch of malaria, and his parents
+would not hear of him going on the water at such a time. As for Red
+Conklin and Lub Ketcham, for some reason or other which they did not care
+to explain, they had been positively refused permission to go along;
+perhaps they were being punished for some misdemeanor; and if so, to
+judge from the long faces they showed, the like would not be apt to
+happen again very soon; for it pained them dreadfully to think that they
+were to be debarred from all that glorious fun which the fortunate
+eighteen had ahead of them.
+
+With nine to a boat there was considerable crowding; but this came mostly
+on account of the tremendous amount of material carried. Why, one would
+almost be inclined to think those boys were going off for a whole three
+months, instead of not more than two weeks at most, to judge from the
+stuff they carried. It takes boys a long time to learn to plan such trips
+as this in light marching order, doing without everything save absolute
+necessities.
+
+Why, there was Bobolink, who ought to have known better, actually trying
+to get Paul to allow him to take along that little garden pump, with its
+line of hose. Just because it had come in so happily when those jokers
+meant to cut the hawser, and set the two boats adrift, Bobolink declared
+there could be no telling how many times it would prove a blessing; but
+Paul utterly refused to carry such a burden; and so in the end it was
+put ashore, and given in charge of the twins to return in safety to the
+Link garden.
+
+When nine o'clock struck, everything seemed to be ready.
+
+"I can't think of anything else; can you. Jack?" Paul asked his second in
+command, and who was to take charge of the _Speedwell_, while Paul
+himself ran the other craft.
+
+"I see you've got the extra gas aboard, and that was one thing I had on
+my mind," replied Jack. "There's nothing else that I know. Look at
+William Carberry, will you? I honestly believe he's figuring in his mind
+right now whether he dares go, against his home order, and jump aboard,
+to sail with us."
+
+"I wouldn't let him, now that I know he couldn't get permission,"
+remarked Paul, promptly. "We want to make a start with a clean record. No
+fellow is going without the full permission of his folks. I'd hate to
+think that any scout sneaked off, and came anyhow. He wouldn't have a
+good time, because all the while he'd be thinking of what was coming when
+he got back."
+
+"Bobolink is rubbing his chin every time he looks at that little garden
+pump," Jack went on, chuckling mightily, as though he enjoyed watching
+the faces of his comrades, and reading all sorts of things there. "He
+just can't see why you wouldn't let him carry it along. I heard him tell
+how it would be good for giving us all a clean-off shower bath, when we
+went in swimming; and all that sort of thing. When he can't have what he
+wants, Bobolink is a hard loser; isn't he, Paul?"
+
+"Well, he beats any one else in hanging on," replied the other. "Now
+take those boxes that little old professor stored one night in your
+father's mill--Bobolink just can't get them out of his mind; and he
+never will be happy till you find out what was in them. After that he'll
+forget all about the things. But if everything is ready, I guess we
+might as well start."
+
+When the _Speedwell_, being on the outside, started to "popping," and
+then moved off, there was a cheer from fully five score of throats;
+and counting the girls who had also come down to see the beginning of
+the motorboat cruise, there must have been nearly double that number
+on the bank.
+
+Then the roomier _Comfort_ also made a start, and following in the wake
+of the pilot boat, turned until her nose pointed down-stream. Flags were
+flying from fore and aft of both boats; and the boys waved their
+campaign hats, while they sent back hearty cheers in answer to the many
+good wishes shouted after them by the crowd ashore, while Bobolink blew
+cheery blasts on his bugle, and Bluff Shipley would have beaten a lively
+tattoo on his drum, only it had been decided best to leave that
+instrument at home.
+
+And with all this noisy send-off, the two boats began to chug-chug down
+the Bushkill, bound for that far-away island in Lake Tokala, about which
+so many strange stories had from time to time been told.
+
+"Well, we're off at last, Bobolink," said Jack, who had that individual
+aboard with him.
+
+"That's right, and everything seems lovely, with the goose hanging high,"
+replied the other. "But seems to me the troop owes us guards a vote of
+thanks for serving as we did. Just think what a lot of grunters we'd have
+been this fine morning, if our boats had been set adrift, and brought up
+on the rocks down below, with chances of holes being knocked in the
+sides! Say, we've got a whole lot to be thankful for, Jack; and my old
+garden pump stood up to the racket first-rate, too."
+
+"That's true, Bobolink; and as soon as we're settled in camp I'm going to
+make sure that the troop acknowledges its indebtedness to you four
+fellows by a vote of thanks, see if I don't."
+
+"Oh say, now, I didn't mean to hint that way," objected the other,
+turning a little red in the face with confusion. "We only did our duty,
+after all, if we did lose a lot of sleep. But then, I guess we got as
+much as a lot of the fellows that went to bed at home. Yes, we're off at
+last, and things look great. I'm as happy as a lark, and that free from
+care--well, I would be, that is, if only somebody could up and give me
+just a hint what those boxes had in 'em. It was so funny to have that
+queer professor store 'em with your father in his mill; and then to have
+somebody sneakin' around, wantin' to steal them. Needn't grin at me that
+way, Jack; you know I'm a little weak in that quarter. I sure _do_ want
+to know! Don't suppose you've heard anything new since I talked with you
+last about it?" and as Jack shook his head in the negative, Bobolink
+looked disappointed, and turned away.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+STUCK FAST IN THE MUD
+
+
+"About three mile's below Stanhope now; aren't we, Paul?" asked Jud
+Elderkin, the leader of the second patrol, who, with Bluff, Nuthin,
+Joe Clausin, Gusty Bellows, Old Dan Tucker, Phil Towns and Little
+Billie, constituted the crew of the _Comfort_, commanded by the scout
+master himself.
+
+Jack had been given charge of the other boat, because Frank Savage was
+not feeling any too well, though probably he had not let his folks know
+about it, lest he be kept at home.
+
+"More than that, Jud," answered the other; "and in the most ticklish part
+of the river, too. I ought to signal the other boat to slow up some more.
+You see, while there are no rocks around here, the eddies form sandbars
+that keep changing, just as I understand they do away out in the big
+Mississippi, so that a pilot on his way up-river finds a new channel cut
+out, and bars that were never there when he went down a week before."
+
+"And notice, too, that Jack's given over the wheel to Bobolink, while he
+is back looking after the motor. Now, Bobolink is a cracker-jack of a
+fellow to get up all sorts of clever schemes for sprinkling creepers in
+the night; but he's a little apt to be flighty when it comes to running a
+boat. There! what did I tell you, Paul; they've run aground, as sure as
+you live!"
+
+"You're right, Jud; and it looks like the _Speedwell_ might go over on
+her beam-ends, the way she's tilted now. Good for Jack; he's ordering
+them all over on the upper side! That may keep her from toppling over!"
+Paul exclaimed, as he gave the wheel a little turn, and headed straight
+for the boat in peril.
+
+"Wow! that was a right smart trick of Jack's!" cried Jud, in admiration.
+"If he'd lost his head, like some fellows I know might have done,
+nothing'd ever kept that boat on her keel. And just to think what a nasty
+job we'd have on our hands, trying to right her again, and before our
+great trip had hardly started."
+
+"Yes," added Old Dan Tucker, who happened to be close to them, "that
+ain't the worst of it. You know the main part of the grub's aboard the
+other boat Think of those juicy hams floatin' off down the Bushkill, with
+not a single tooth ever bein' put in 'em; and all that bread and stuff
+soaked. Oh! it gives me a cold shiver to even think of it," for Dan loved
+the bugle call that announced dining time better than any other music.
+
+The greatest excitement prevailed aboard both boats. Jack seemed to be
+keeping his crew perched along the upper rail, where their weight had the
+effect of holding the boat with the narrower beam from toppling over on
+her side. It looked like a close shave, as Jud Elderkin said, with that
+swift current rushing past on the port quarter, and almost lapping the
+rim of the cockpit.
+
+Of course, as soon as she struck Jack had shut off power, so that the
+boat was now lying like a stranded little whale.
+
+Paul brought up alongside, looking out that he did not strike the same
+unseen sandbar.
+
+"Take this rope, some of you, and make fast to that cleat at the stern,"
+Paul called out, giving a whirl that sent it aboard the tilted motorboat.
+
+"What are you meaning to do, Paul; give us a pull back?" asked Jack, who
+did not seem to be one-half so "rattled" by the mishap as some of the
+other fellows; simply because he had the faculty of keeping his wits
+about him in an emergency.
+
+"That's the only way I can see," came the reply. "And as the stern
+is under water, Jack, what's the matter with backing when we start
+to pulling?"
+
+"Not a thing, that I can see," answered the skipper of the _Speedwell_;
+"But I hope she slides off all right."
+
+"Have your crew get as far aft as they can," continued Paul. "That will
+lighten the bow, more or less. And keep them all on the side they're on;
+only as soon as she drops back on an even keel, they must get over, so
+she won't swing to starboard too much. All ready, now?"
+
+"Yes, the rope's tied fast to the cleat, and unless you yank that out by
+the roots, the boat's just _got_ to move! Say when, Paul," with which
+Jack again bent over the three horse-power motor with which the faster
+boat was equipped.
+
+Paul took one look around before giving the word. He wanted to make sure
+that everything was in readiness, so there might be no hitch. A mistake
+at that critical stage might result in bringing about the very accident
+they were striving to avoid, and as a consequence it was wise to make
+haste slowly. That is always a rule good scout masters lay down to the
+boys under their charge. "Slow but sure" is a motto that many a boy would
+be wise to take to himself through life.
+
+And when Paul had made certain that everything was in readiness he
+started the motor of the _Comfort_, reversing his lever; so that every
+ounce of force was exerted to drag the companion boat off its sandy bed.
+
+Jack complied with the requirements of the situation by also starting
+his motor the same way; and with the happiest results.
+
+"Hurrah! she's moving!" cried little Nuthin, who was not in danger, but
+just as much excited as though the reverse had been the case.
+
+"There she comes!" yelled several of the anxious scouts, as the
+_Speedwell_ was seen to start backward.
+
+"One good pull deserves another; eh, fellows?" cried the delighted
+Bobolink, who was wondering whether Jack would ever entrust the wheel to
+his care again, after that accident; but he need not have worried, for
+somehow the skipper did not seem to feel that it was his fault.
+
+And Bobolink, when he was again placed in charge of the wheel, felt that
+he had had a lesson that would last him some time. In this sort of work
+there could be no telling what was going to happen; hence, each scout
+would be wise to remember the rule by which they were supposed to always
+be guided, and "be prepared." That meant being watchful, wakeful,
+earnest, and looking for signs to indicate trouble, so that should it
+come they would not be caught napping.
+
+After a little while they came in sight of Manchester, with its smoking
+stacks, and its busy mills. Possibly the news of the expedition of the
+Stanhope Troop had been carried to the boys down here. At any rate, there
+was a group of several fellows wearing the well known khaki-uniform, who
+waved to them from the bank and acted as though wishing the expedition
+success. They were pretty good fellows, those Manchester scouts, and the
+Stanhope boys liked them much more than they did the members of the
+Aldine troop up the river. Everybody knows there is a vast difference in
+boys; and sometimes even the fellows in various towns will seem, to be
+built along certain lines, having pretty much the same leading
+characteristics. The Manchester lads had proven a straight-forward set in
+what competitions the several troops had had so far. And hence every
+fellow aboard the two boats swung his hat, and sent back hearty cheers.
+
+"What's the matter with Manchester? She's all right!" they called, in
+unison, as Gusty Bellows took upon himself the duties which, on the ball
+field, made him invaluable as the "cheer captain."
+
+His name was really Gustavus Bellows; but that was easily corrupted into
+Gusty when the fellows learned on his first coming to Stanhope what a
+tremendous voice he had.
+
+About a mile or so below Manchester, Paul had said, the mouth of what
+had once been Jackson Creek, might be found. Several of the boys
+could remember having heard more or less about that abandoned canal;
+perhaps the Manchester lads knew about it, since it was closer to
+their home town.
+
+Everybody, then, was anxiously scanning the shore on the left, because
+they knew it must lie somewhere along there.
+
+"I see the mouth!" exclaimed Phil Towns, who had very keen eyesight.
+"Just look on the other side of that crooked tree, and you'll glimpse
+a little bar that juts out. That must be on the upper side of the
+creek's mouth; because Paul said bars nearly always form there. How
+about that, Paul?"
+
+"Go up head, Phil; you've struck the bull's eye," replied the other, with
+a laugh, as he began to head in toward the crooked tree mentioned, and
+which doubtless he took for his landmark when in search of the creek.
+
+The _Comfort_ was in the lead now. Jack was content to play "second
+fiddle," as he called it. As Paul had gone through the disused canal in
+his canoe, exploring it pretty thoroughly, he must act as pilot.
+
+Once they had pushed past the mouth of the creek they found a rather
+disheartening prospect. The water seemed very low, so that they could see
+bottom everywhere. Even Paul frowned, and shook his head.
+
+"It surely must have lowered several inches since I was here yesterday,"
+he declared, in dismay.
+
+"Think we'll get through safely?" queried Jud Elderkin, anxiously.
+
+"I hope we may," replied the scout master; "but we've just got to creep
+along, and be mighty careful. You see, most of the bed of this canal is
+mud, and not sand. Once the sharp bow starts to rooting in that, there's
+no telling how far we'll explore before letting up. And it's surprising
+how that same mud clings. I could hardly work my light canoe loose two or
+three times. Just seemed like ten pair of hands had hold of her, and were
+gripping tight. Easy there, Jack, take another notch in your speed, old
+fellow! Crawl along, if you can. And have the poles ready to fend off, if
+we get into any bad hole."
+
+The boys were strung along the sides of the slowly moving motorboats.
+Every fellow came near holding his breath with nervousness.
+
+"Excuse me from getting stuck here in this nasty mess," remarked Nat
+Smith, on board the roomier boat with Jack, Bobolink, Tom Betts, Andy
+Flinn, Curly Baxter, Spider Sexton, Frank Savage and Bob Tice.
+
+"Why, we might stay here a week," observed the last mentioned, in a voice
+that told plainly how little he would relish such a mishap, when they had
+planned such splendid times ahead.
+
+"All summer, if it didn't rain, because the creek would get lower all
+the time." Paul himself observed, with emphasis, wishing to make every
+scout resolve to avoid this catastrophe, if it were at all possible.
+
+"Who'd ever think," remarked Jud, "that there was such a queer old
+place as this not more'n seven miles away from home? And not one of us
+ever poked a boat's nose up this same creek before Paul came down, to
+spy out things."
+
+"Oh! well, there's a reason for that," replied Phil Towns, who knew all
+about everything that had ever happened in and around Stanhope. "Until
+lately, when the scouts organized in these three towns, the boys of
+Stanhope and those of Manchester never had much to do with each other.
+Many's the stone fight I've been in with those big mill chaps. Sometimes
+we whipped them; and then again they chased us right home. So no Stanhope
+boy ever dared go far down the river in the old days. That's the reason,
+I guess, why none of us ever tried to explore this place. Say, we seem to
+be getting in worse and worse, Paul. It isn't more'n a foot deep over
+there on the right, and less'n ten inches here on the left."
+
+"I know it, Phil, and I'm beginning to be afraid we'll have to back out
+of this the best way we can," replied the scout master, reluctantly; for
+his heart had been set on carrying out this plan, and he hated to be
+compelled to give it up.
+
+Hardly had he spoken than the boat brought up with a jolt that came near
+throwing several of the scouts into the water and mud. They had run
+aground after all! Paul turned the motor to the reverse, and the little
+propeller fairly sizzled in its mad efforts to drag the craft back into
+clear water, but it was just as Paul had said--there seemed to be
+innumerable hands clinging fore and aft that refused to let go. And in
+spite of all the work of the motor they did not move an inch.
+
+"Rotten luck!" exploded Jud Elderkin, as he looked helplessly around, as
+if to see whether a fellow could at least jump ashore; but since ten feet
+of that ooze lay on either side, he failed to get much encouragement.
+
+"Ahoy, _Speedwell_, you'll have to give us a lift!" called Paul, making a
+megaphone out of his hands.
+
+"Y-y-yes, t-t-turn about's f-f-fair p-p-play," added Bluff, waving his
+bugle. "We p-p-pulled you off, and n-n-now you g-g-got to return the
+f-f-favor."
+
+"Listen!" said Paul, sharply; "Jack's calling something."
+
+And as they all lined up along the side of the _Comfort_ they heard
+Jack's voice come across the forty feet of water and mud, saying:
+
+"Only wish we could, Commodore; but sad to say, we're stuck about as fast
+in this lovely mess as you are, and can't budge her an inch!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+WHAT THE WATER GAUGE SHOWED
+
+
+"Well, here is a pretty kettle of fish!" grunted the disgusted Jud. "We
+seem to take to sandbars and mud flats today to beat the band."
+
+Paul had stopped the motor, since it seemed useless. But of course he did
+not mean to give up trying to get the boat off.
+
+"One thing's sure," he said, positively, when the others gathered around
+him, as if in this emergency they looked to the scout master to invent
+some method of beating the sticky mud at its own game; "every minute we
+stay here makes it all the worse for us."
+
+"Yes, because our weight is sure to make the boat sink deeper in her
+nest!" declared Little Billie, leaning far over the side, as if to see
+how far down in her muddy bed the boat lay.
+
+"Yes, that's one thing," added Paul; "but another is the fact that the
+creek is falling all the time. Unless it rains, there'll soon be nothing
+but mud around us. Now, every fellow crowd back here, and leave the bow
+as free as we can. That might loosen the grip of the mud; and when I
+turn on the motor at full speed again, let's hope she'll move."
+
+It was a sensible suggestion; and indeed, about the only thing possible,
+since the other boat, being in the same fix, could not come near, either
+to give a friendly tug, or take off the _Comfort's_ crew.
+
+When he had them all as far in the stern as they could get, with a
+warning not to allow themselves to be shaken loose, unless they wanted a
+mud bath, the skipper started his motor working.
+
+When it was going at full speed the boat quivered and strained, but did
+not move, so far as any one could see; and they were all eager to detect
+the first sign of motion.
+
+"No good!" sighed Jud. "Might as well look the thing in the face,
+fellows. Here we stay, and eat up all our grub, day after day. Ain't it
+fierce, though? How d'ye suppose we'll ever stand it? If anybody had a
+pair of wings now, and could fly ashore, we might get help to pull us
+out. But we couldn't use our wigwag flags, even if we tried, because
+who'd see 'em? Oh! what tough luck!"
+
+Paul may have felt somewhat discouraged himself, but he was not the
+fellow to betray the fact--so early in the game, at least.
+
+"Well, Jud," he said, soberly, "perhaps we may have to stick it out
+here for a while, but I hope it won't be as bad as you say. And make
+up your mind that if we do, it'll be a mighty strange thing, with
+eighteen wide awake scouts to think up all sorts of schemes and dodges
+that we can try."
+
+"That's the stuff, Paul!" exclaimed Phil Towns. "Every fellow ought to
+get right down to hard pan, and try to think up some way of beating this
+old sticky mud. What's the use of being scouts, if we let a little thing
+like this get the better of us? If I could only wade ashore, I'd fix a
+hawser to a tree back there, and then by workin' the engine p'raps we
+might pull the boat off. I've seen 'em do that with a steamboat, away
+down on Indian River, when I was with my folks in Florida last winter.
+And it worked, too."
+
+"Well, try the wading; it looks fine!" laughed Joe Clausin.
+
+"Don't think of it," called out Gusty Bellows at that moment. "I stuck
+this pole down in the soft slush, and my stars! it goes right through to
+China, I reckon. Anyhow, I couldn't reach bottom. And if you jumped over,
+Phil, you'd be up to your neck at the start. Let's tie a rope under your
+arms first, anyhow."
+
+But Paul quickly put an end to all this sort of talk.
+
+"There's no use trying anything like that," he said. "Even if you did
+reach the shore, we haven't got a rope long and strong enough to do the
+business. Besides, we may have help soon."
+
+With that all the boys began craning their necks, as if they expected to
+see some kind of a queer craft that could pass over mud as easily as
+other boats did water, bearing down on them, with the design of dragging
+them from the bank,
+
+"Say, what does he mean? For the life of me I can't glimpse anything
+worth shucks; and the blooming old _Speedwell_ seems to be sticking tight
+and fast, just the same way we are. Loosen up, Paul, and put us wise;
+won't you?" pleaded Phil.
+
+"I didn't mean that any living thing was going to hold out a hand to
+us," remarked the smiling scout master; "but look aloft, boys, and see
+what's coming."
+
+With that they followed his instructions.
+
+A general shout went up.
+
+"Whee! rain a-comin' down on us! Get the curtains ready to button fast,
+boys, or we'll have all our fine stuff soaked through and through."
+Little Billie called, himself setting things in motion by seizing one of
+the rolled curtains, and letting it come down, to be fastened around the
+cockpit by means of gummets and screws.
+
+"But Paul meant something else," declared Jud Elderkin, wisely. "You see,
+if only that rain does come, and it's heavy enough, there's going to be
+a lot more water in this old canal than we need to pull through with. You
+know how quick the Bushkill River rises; and I guess it's the same way
+with the Radway."
+
+"Oh! don't we wish that there'll just be a little old cloud-burst!" cried
+Gusty Bellows. "I could stand anything but staying here seven or ten
+days, doin' nothing, only eat, and stare at this mud, and wish I was back
+home. Come on, little clouds; get a move on you, and let's hear you growl
+like thunder."
+
+They had by now called the attention of the others to the prospects for
+rain. Indeed, as soon as the first curtain fell, some of Jack's crew took
+note of the significant fact, and they could be seen looking up at the
+blackening heavens. There had been very few times in the past when those
+boys had hoped it would rain. Perhaps, when they were kept home from a
+picnic--for reasons--some of them may have secretly wished the clouds
+would let down a little flood, so that those who had been lucky enough to
+go, might not have such a laugh on them after all.
+
+But certainly they never felt just as they did now, while watching the
+play of those gathering storm clouds.
+
+"And the best of the joke is," commented Jud, with a grin, "that lots of
+the good folks at home right now are looking up at those same black
+clouds, and pitying us boys. They don't realize how we're just praying
+that the rain won't turn out a fizzle, after all. Wasn't that a drop I
+felt?"
+
+[Transcriber's note: Beginning of sentence missing from original text]
+till that gray gets nearly overhead," remarked Paul, pointing up
+at a line marked across the heavens about half-way toward the horizon,
+and in the direction of the wind.
+
+"It's getting dark, anyway," remarked Nuthin, rather timidly; for truth
+to tell, the small boy had never ceased to remember how, earlier in the
+season, when in camp up near Rattlesnake Mountain, a terrible storm had
+struck them and as he clung desperately to the tent they were trying to
+hold down, he had actually been carried up into the branches of a tree,
+from which position only the prompt work of his fellow scouts had finally
+rescued him.
+
+"And look at that flash of lightning, would you?" echoed Joe Clausin.
+"Wow! that was a heavy bang; wasn't it? Tell you now, that bolt must 'a
+struck somethin'! Always does, they say, when it comes quick like that."
+
+"How's the cover; just as snug as you can make it, boys?" demanded Paul;
+"because we'll likely get a bit of a blow first, before the rain comes,
+and it'd be a bad job if we lost this whole business. Stand by to grab
+hold wherever you can. After that, if we weather it all right, there'll
+be no trouble."
+
+"And say, she's coming licketty-split, believe me," called Jud. "I c'n
+hear it hummin' through the trees over there like the mischief. Take
+hold, everybody; and don't let it get away from you!"
+
+"We'll all go up together this time, then!" muttered little Nuthin; but
+with the grit that seemed a part of his nature, once he started in to do
+anything, he also seized the canvas covering at the bottom, and set his
+teeth hard.
+
+With a roar the wind struck them. Had it come from the right quarter Paul
+believed it might have helped work them loose; but it happened
+unfortunately that just the reverse was the case. If anything, they were
+driven on the mud-bank all the harder.
+
+But at any rate the tarpaulin canopy did not break loose, and that was
+something to be satisfied with.
+
+The wind whooped and howled for perhaps three minutes. Then it died down,
+as if giving up the attempt to tear the boat's top out of the hands of
+the determined boys.
+
+"The worst's over, fellows!" called Paul, breathing hard.
+
+"Hurrah! that's better'n saying it is yet to come. How'd the _Speedwell_
+make out?" Jud asked, sinking back on a thwart, the better to find some
+place to peep out.
+
+"Seems to be all there," replied Nuthin, who had been quicker to look
+than the more clumsy Jud. "She's got her cover on, and I guess that means
+they're safe and sound; but she don't seem to be floatin' worth a cent.
+
+"No more are we; but listen, there comes the rain. Now for it," observed
+Paul, as with a rush the water began to descend, rattling on the roof of
+the canopy cover.
+
+"Fine! Keep right along that way for a while, and something's bound
+to get a move on it, which I hope will be our two boats!" cried
+Gusty Bellows.
+
+"Did you ever hear it come down heavier than that?" demanded Old Dan
+Tucker, as he looked anxiously around to see that none of the cargo was
+exposed to the flood.
+
+"Wonder if this old thing sheds water?" suggested Jud, looking up at the
+heavy canopy as though he fancied that he felt a stream trickling down
+the back of his neck.
+
+"You can bank on it," declared Joe Clausin. "Anything Mr. Everett owns
+has got to be gilt-edged. And he'd never stand for a leaky canopy.
+What're you lookin' at out there, Paul?" for the scout master was leaning
+a little out on the side away from their companion boat in misery.
+
+"Why, you see," replied the scout master, drawing his head back, "I
+fixed a little contrivance here, just before the storm broke, and I'm
+looking now to see whether it shows the least gain in water. I marked
+this pole with inches, and rammed it just so far in the mud. If the water
+starts to rising any, I can tell as soon as I look."
+
+"And is she going up yet?" asked Jud, eagerly,
+
+"Well, it wouldn't be fair to expect that for some time yet," replied
+Paul. "At the best I expect we'll have to stay here an hour or so, until
+the water up-stream has a chance to come down. I hope it may surprise me,
+and get here quicker than that. And boys, if we have to spend all that
+time doing nothing, why we might try that little oil stove Mr. Everett
+has, and see how it can get us a pot of coffee, with our cold lunch."
+
+"What time is it now?" asked Jud; while Old Dan Tucker pricked up his
+ears, at the prospect of "something doing" along his favorite line.
+
+"Going on eleven; and I had my breakfast awful early!" remarked
+Little Billie.
+
+"And I had hardly a bite--reckon I was too much excited to eat--so I'm
+mighty near starved right now," declared Dan Tucker; but then the boys
+had known him to put up that same sort of a plea only an hour after
+devouring the biggest meal possible, so they did not expect to see him
+collapse yet awhile from weakness through lack of food.
+
+All the same, Paul agreed that it might serve to distract their minds if
+they did have lunch. He also asked Jud to get in communication with those
+on the other boat, if the rain had let up enough for them to exchange
+signals, and by means of the flag, tell them what those on the _Comfort_
+meant to do.
+
+Just as Bobolink, who answered, had informed them that those under Jack
+were about to follow the same course, Paul took another glance at his
+rude water gauge.
+
+When he drew in his head, Jud, who had been waiting to tell what the
+others reported, saw that Paul was smiling as though pleased.
+
+"What's doing, Commodore?" he asked.
+
+"The water has risen half an inch, and is still going up," replied Paul.
+
+At that there was a roar of delight--only Old Dan Tucker was so busy
+watching the lunch being got ready, he did not seem to hear the
+joyous news.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+ON THE SWIFT RADWAY
+
+
+"Let me work my flags a little, and tell the other boat the news!"
+suggested Jud; and as no one objected he got busy.
+
+It was good practice, and he had something worth while to communicate, so
+Jud enjoyed the task.
+
+By the time he was through, lunch was ready, the coffee having boiled
+enough to please the most critical among the boys.
+
+"Rain seems to be letting up some," remarked Gusty Bellows, as they
+gathered around to discuss what was to be their first meal of the trip.
+
+"Oh! I hope it isn't going to tantalize us, and raise our hopes only to
+dash 'em down again," said Gusty.
+
+"From the signs I don't think we're through with it all yet," Paul
+observed; and as they had considerable faith in the acting scout master
+as a weather prophet, there arose a sigh of satisfaction at this remark.
+
+"Take a look, and see if she's still moving up the scale, Paul," begged
+the anxious Phil Towns.
+
+When this had been done, there was a look of eager expectancy on
+every face.
+
+"Over a full inch since the start," Paul reported.
+
+"And that's nearly half an hour back," complained Gusty. "Gee! if it goes
+up as slow as that, we'll be camping here at sun-down, sure, fellers."
+
+"Oh! I don't know," Paul put in, confidently; "you must remember that
+the rain has fallen all over the watershed that supplies both these
+rivers; and this canal now serves as a link between the two. If either
+one rises a good deal, we're just bound to get the benefit of that
+little flood. Even at an inch an hour we could be moving out of this
+before a great while. And I expect that the rise will do better than
+that, presently. Just eat away, and wait. Nothing like keeping cool when
+you just have to."
+
+"Yes, when you tumble overboard, like I did once on a time," chuckled
+Jud. "I kept perfectly cool; in fact, none of you ever saw a cooler
+feller; because it was an ice-boat I dropped out of; and took a header
+into an open place on the good old Bushkill. Oh! I can be as cool as a
+cucumber--when I have to."
+
+An hour later Paul announced that the rise had not only kept up as he
+predicted, but was increasing.
+
+"Here's good news for you, fellows," he remarked, after examining his
+post, "if it keeps on rising like it's doing right now, we'll be starting
+in less than another hour!"
+
+"Whoopee! that suits me!" cried Gusty, enthusiastically.
+
+"Ditto here," echoed Jud. "I never was born for inaction; like to be
+doing something all the time."
+
+"So do I," Paul observed, quietly; "but when I find myself blocked in one
+direction I just turn in another, and take up some other work. In that
+way I manage not only to keep busy, but to shunt off trouble as well. Try
+it some time, Jud, and I give you my word you'll feel better."
+
+But that next hour seemed very long to many of the impatient boys. They
+even accused the owner of the watch of having failed to wind it on the
+preceding night, just because it did not seem inclined to keep pace with
+their imagination.
+
+The water was rising steadily, if slowly, and some of them declared that
+there was now a perceptible motion to the boat whenever they moved about.
+
+Urged on by an almost unanimous call, Paul finally agreed to start the
+motor again, and see what the result would be. So Jud sent the order to
+the second boat by means of his signal flags.
+
+When the cheerful popping of the _Comfort's_ exhaust made itself heard,
+there was an almost simultaneous cheer from the scouts.
+
+"We're off!" they shouted, in great glee.
+
+"Goodbye, old mud bank!" cried Gusty, waving his hand in mock adieu
+to the unlucky spot where so much precious time had been wasted. "See
+you later!"
+
+"Not much we will!" echoed Joe Clausin. "I've got that spot marked with a
+red cross in my mind, and if this boat ever gets close to it again,
+you'll hear this chicken cackle right smart. It's been photographed on my
+brain so that I'll see it lots of times when I wake up in the night."
+
+"How about the other boat?" asked Paul, who was stooping down to fix
+something connected with the motor at the time, and could not stop to
+look for himself, although he could hear the throbbing of the
+_Speedwell's_ machinery.
+
+"Oh! she slid off easier than we did, I reckon," remarked Old Dan Tucker,
+now snuggled down comfortably, and apparently in a mood to take things
+easy, since it would be a long time between "eats."
+
+"Tell them to go slow, all the same, Jud," Paul remarked.
+
+"You don't seem to trust this creek as much as you might, Paul?"
+chuckled Gusty, who was handling the wheel, during the minute that
+Paul was busy.
+
+"Well, after that experience I confess that I'm a little suspicious of
+all kinds of mud banks. They're the easiest things to strike up an
+acquaintance with, and a little the hardest to say goodbye to, of
+anything I ever met. Give her a little twist to the left, Gusty. That
+place dead ahead don't strike me as the channel. That's the ticket. I
+guess we missed another slam into a waiting mud bank. Now I'll take the
+wheel again, if you don't mind."
+
+"Rain's over!" announced Little Billie.
+
+"Looks like it, with that break up yonder," Jud remarked, glancing aloft.
+"Hope so, anyhow. We've had all the water we needed, and if it kept on
+coming we'd be apt to find things kind of damp up there at the island."
+
+The mention of that word caused several of the boys to glance quickly at
+each other. It was as though a shiver had chased up and down their spinal
+columns. For Joe and Little Billie, and perhaps Gusty Bellows, were not
+quite as easy in their minds about that "ghost-ridden" island as they
+might have been; although, if taken to task, all would doubtless have
+stoutly denied any belief in things supernatural.
+
+The _Comfort_ acted as the pilot boat, and led the way, slowly but
+surely, with the _Speedwell_ not far behind. The latter had one or two
+little adventures with flirting mud banks, but nothing serious, although
+on each occasion the cries of dismay from the crew could be plainly heard
+aboard the leading craft.
+
+And so they came in sight of a river that had a decided current, after
+the smart shower had added considerably to its flow. By now the sun was
+shining, and the rain clouds had about vanished, being "hull-down" in the
+distance, as Jud expressed it; for since they were now on a voyage, he
+said that they might as well make use of such nautical terms as they
+could remember.
+
+"That's the roaring Radway, I take it," observed Gusty, as all of them
+caught glimpses of the river through the trees ahead.
+
+"Just what it is," replied Paul; "and as it has quite a strong current,
+we're going to have our hands full, pushing up the miles that lie between
+here and our camping place."
+
+"But we c'n do it before dark; can't we, Paul?" asked Phil Towns.
+
+"Sure we can, if nothing happens to knock us out," said Gusty, before the
+other could reply. "Why, we've got several hours yet, if we did have such
+tough luck in the blooming old canal."
+
+"We ought to be mighty glad we got off as as easy as we did, that's
+what!" declared Old Dan Tucker, who was something of a philosopher in
+his way, and could look at the bright side as well as the next one,
+always providing the food supply held out.
+
+Ten minutes later the _Comfort_ was in Radway River, headed
+up-stream. Just as Paul had said, the current proved very swift, and
+while the little motor worked faithfully and well, their progress was
+not very rapid.
+
+Besides, it kept them always on the watch. No one was acquainted with
+the channel, and the presence of rocks might not always be detected from
+surface indications. Some of the treacherous snags were apt to lie out
+of sight, but ready to give them a hard knock, and perhaps smash a hole
+in the bow.
+
+And so Paul stationed two boys in positions where they could watch for
+every suspicious eddy, which was to be brought to his attention
+immediately it was discovered.
+
+An hour passed, and they were still moving steadily up the river. Paul,
+in reply to many questions by his impatient comrades, announced that to
+the best of his knowledge they ought to arrive at their destination an
+hour and more before dark; which pacified the croakers, who had been
+saying the chances were they would have to spend their first night on the
+bank, short of the island by a mile or more.
+
+"That's all right," Old Dan Tucker had remarked; "just so long as we get
+ashore in time to build our cooking fire, it suits me."
+
+Everything seemed to be moving along with clock-like regularity, the
+boat breasting the current and throwing the spray in fine style, when
+Jud gave a cry.
+
+"Something's happened to the _Speedwell_!" he announced.
+
+Of course every eye was instantly turned back, and they were just in time
+to see something that announced the truth of Jud's assertion.
+
+Andy Flinn stood up in the bow of the second boat, which no longer
+chugged away as before, and he threw something out that splashed in
+the water.
+
+"It's their anchor!" cried Jud. "Either somebody's overboard, or else
+their motor's broken down!"
+
+"It's the motor, I guess," Paul observed. "Get out our anchor, and
+follow suit."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+DODGING THE SNAGS AND THE SNARES
+
+
+A minute later both motorboats lay anchored in the middle of the
+swift-flowing Radway, and about sixty feet apart.
+
+"What's the matter?" shouted Jud, taking it upon himself to learn the
+facts in the quickest possible time, so that signal flags were not used.
+
+"Something's happened to our motor; but Jack thinks he can fix her up,
+given a little time," came in the voice of Bobolink.
+
+"Well, call on us if we can help out any," Paul shouted; for the slapping
+of the water against the sides of the boat, as well as over the stones on
+either hand, made it hard to hear plainly.
+
+"What if they can't fix the motor up?" remarked Phil Towns; "I hope that
+won't mean we've got to spend the whole night out here in the middle of
+the river."
+
+"Oh I if it comes to the worst, we can tow her ashore; and then it's camp
+on the river bank for ours," announced Paul, cheerfully. He always seemed
+to have plans made up in advance, as though anticipating every trouble
+that could arise, and getting ready for it.
+
+"Huh! that mightn't be so bad, after all," grunted Joe Clausin; and even
+Gusty Bellows and Little Billie nodded their heads, as if agreeing that
+there were things less desirable than camping on the bank.
+
+The minutes dragged along, until half an hour had gone. Even Paul began
+to show signs of restlessness. He finally made a megaphone of his hands,
+and called to Bobolink:
+
+"Tell Jack to step up; I'd like to ask him a question or two."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," replied the other, touching his forelock in true
+man-o'-war style, and immediately the head of Jack appeared.
+
+"What's the good word, Jack?" asked the Commodore of the expedition. "Can
+you make the mend, d'ye think; and just about how long is it going to
+take you?"
+
+"Between five and ten minutes, not more," came the reply; "I've got the
+hang of it now, and the end's in sight."
+
+"Whoopee! that sounds good to me!" shouted Gusty Bellows, waving his hat.
+
+Five minutes had hardly passed before they heard the familiar pop-pop-pop
+of the _Speedwell's_ motor exhaust.
+
+"How is it?" called Paul once more.
+
+"Fine and dandy," answered Bobolink, waving his bugle; and giving a few
+vigorous blasts to indicate that victory was nigh.
+
+"They're hauling in the anchor, which is a good sign," declared Nuthin.
+
+Presently both boats were again breasting the stream. Apparently no
+serious result had come from the accident, save that more than a good
+half-hour had been wasted. But still Paul declared that he had hopes of
+making their destination before darkness set in.
+
+The sun was getting very low, and the river looked desolate indeed. It
+was bordered by swampy land; and where the ground showed, there seemed to
+be such a vast number of rocks that farming had never been attempted.
+
+"What d'y'e suppose is in those marshes?" Gusty asked, after they had
+passed about the fifth.
+
+"I understand that a lot of cranberries are gathered here every Fall, and
+sent down to the cities for the market," Jud Elderkin replied.
+
+"And seems to me a bear was killed last year somewhere up here," Nuthin'
+put in, rather timidly. "So I'm glad you brought that gun along, Paul. We
+are not lookin' for a bear, because we never lost one; but if he _did_
+come to camp it'd be nice to feel that we could give the old chap a warm
+reception."
+
+"Huh! I can see the warm reception he'd get," chuckled Jud.
+"Seventeen trees would each one have a scout sitting up in the
+branches as quick as hot cakes. Guess Paul would have to be the
+reception committee all alone."
+
+"Don't you believe it," remarked Gusty Bellows; "You'd see me making for
+the axe in a _big_ hurry, I believe in an axe. It makes one of the
+greatest weapons for defence you ever saw. I've practiced swinging it
+around, and I know just how to strike."
+
+"Well, we'll remember that; won't we, fellows?" remarked Jud, with a
+laugh. "Plenty of axe exercise Gusty needs, to keep him in trim for
+bears; and I can see now how our firewood is going to be attended to."
+
+They kept pushing on all the while; and there was never a time that the
+lookout did not have to keep his eyes on the alert, because of the traps
+and snares that lay in wait for the voyagers up the rough Radway.
+
+"Great river, I don't think!" Joe Clausin ventured to remark, after they
+had done considerable dodging, to avoid a mass of rocks that blocked the
+way in a direct line.
+
+"Still, you'll notice that there's always a passage around," said Paul.
+"It's that way with nearly everything. Lots of times we don't see the
+opening till we get right on it, and then all of a sudden, there's the
+path out."
+
+"I guess you're right, Paul," observed Joe. "Things do happen to a fellow
+sometimes, in a funny way, and just when he feels like giving up, he sees
+the light. You remember a lot of trouble I had once, and how it turned
+out splendidly? And so I learned my lesson, I sure did. I look at things
+different now. It showed me how silly it is to worry over things that you
+can't help."
+
+"But all the same," remarked Gusty, "I wish we had a squint at that same
+old lake ahead. It's getting sunset, and beyond, Paul."
+
+"I know it, and we must be pretty near the place now," replied the scout
+master. "Unless we see it inside of ten minutes I'll have to give the
+word to turn in to the shore at the next half-way decent landing, where
+there seems to be enough water to float our boats."
+
+"There's a good place right now," declared Joe, pointing; "and we
+mightn't run across as fine a landing again."
+
+"Ten minutes, I said," repeated Paul, positively; because he believed
+that there were certain signs to tell him they would come in sight of
+the big lake, from which the Radway flowed, after they had turned the
+next bend.
+
+Somehow the others seemed to guess what he had in mind, and all were
+anxiously watching as they drew near the bend.
+
+As the trees ceased to shut out their view, they gave a shout of delight,
+for the lake was there, just as Paul had anticipated.
+
+"Whew! she's a big place, all right!" declared Jud, as they looked toward
+the distant shore, where the trees seemed lost in the shadows.
+
+"I never dreamed there was a lake like this so near Stanhope," declared
+Joe, as he stared. "That one up by Rattlesnake Mountain could be put in a
+corner of Tokala, and wouldn't be missed. And say, that must be the
+island over yonder; don't you think so, Paul?"
+
+"Look and see if you can sight a cedar growing on the top of the hill
+that they say stands in the middle of the island," suggested the scout
+master, still busy at the wheel; for the danger was not yet all over, as
+they had not entered the lake itself, though very near.
+
+"It's there, all to the good!" announced Jud.
+
+"Anybody could see that" added Gusty, who was a little jealous of the
+superior eyesight of several of his comrades, he being a trifle
+near-sighted.
+
+"Well, if we are going to make a job of it, the sooner it's over the
+better," was the queer remark Joe made; but no one paid any particular
+attention to his words, they were so taken up with watching the island.
+
+And so the leading motorboat left the noisy waters of the Radway, and
+glided into the smoother lake, much to the satisfaction of the crew; for
+the boys had grown tired of the constant need of watchfulness in avoiding
+reefs and snags.
+
+Paul shut off power, and waited to see whether the companion boat
+succeeded in reaching the calm waters of the big lake as successfully as
+they had done. As it was now pretty close to dark, in spite of the
+half-moon that hung overhead, seeing the partly hidden rocks was not an
+easy task.
+
+And so he watched with not a little concern the progress of the
+_Speedwell_ during those last few minutes. But Jack was alive to the
+situation; and managed to bring his boat safely through, being greeted
+with a cheer from those on board the waiting _Comfort_.
+
+"Now it's straight for the island!" called out Bobolink, as the boats
+drew together, and the motors started as cheerfully as if they had not
+undergone a hard day's work from the time the voyagers left Stanhope.
+
+"We'll have to make camp by firelight, that's plain," grumbled Gusty.
+
+"What's the odds, so long as we get fairly comfortable for the night?"
+Bobolink retorted, being one of the kind who can make the best of a bad
+bargain when necessary. "All we want to do is to get the tents up and a
+fire going, so we can cook something. Then in the morning we'll do all
+the fancy fixing you can shake a stick at, and try out all the new
+wrinkles every fellow's had in mind since our last camp. This is what I
+like. A lake for me, with an island in it that nobody lives on, but
+p'raps an old wildcat or a she bear with cubs."
+
+"But they say something _does_ live on it, and that he's a terror too; a
+real wild man that's got hair all over him like a big baboon--I heard it
+from a man that saw him once, and he wouldn't lie about it either," Joe
+Clausin called out.
+
+Although the rest of the scouts mocked him, and pretended to jeer at the
+idea of such a thing as a wild man existing so near Stanhope,
+nevertheless, as the two motorboats gradually shortened the distance
+separating them from the mysterious island, they gazed long at the dark
+mass lying on the still water of the big lake and its gloomy appearance
+affected them.
+
+Just as Joe Clausin had said, it had a real "spooky" air, that, at the
+time, with night at hand, did not impress them very favorably.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+THE CAMP ON CEDAR ISLAND
+
+
+It was with extreme caution that the two motor-boats crept along the
+shore of the island, with numerous eyes on the lookout for a good
+landing place.
+
+"Seems to be plenty of water right here," remarked Jud, who was sounding
+with one of the poles. "Eight feet, if an inch, Paul."
+
+Paul shut off the power immediately.
+
+"And this looks like the best sort of place to make our landing," he
+said. "If we don't like it, or find a better for a permanent camp in the
+morning, we can change. Get busy with the poles, fellows, and shove the
+boat alongside that bank there."
+
+This was readily done, and Jud was the first to jump ashore. He wanted to
+be able to say that of the whole troop he had landed before any one else,
+ghost or no ghost.
+
+Soon the others followed suit, even if Joe and Little Billie--and yes,
+Gusty Bellows also looked timidly around. There was Nuthin, always
+reckoned a rather timorous chap, showing himself indifferent to spirits,
+and all such things. What bothered Nuthin concerned material things, like
+cats, and dogs, and wandering bears; he snapped his fingers at spooks,
+because he had never seen one, and did not believe in "fairy stories," as
+he called them, anyway.
+
+As the second boat came alongside, and her crew swarmed over the side,
+there were plenty of hands to do things, though they naturally looked to
+Paul for orders.
+
+"A fire, first, fellows!" called out the scout master; "so we can see
+what we're doing. Because it's getting pretty dark around here, with
+these trees overhead. Jud, you take charge of that part, and the rest
+gather wood."
+
+Many hands make light work, and in what Bobolink called a "jiffy" there
+came plenty of wood of all kinds, from dead branches to small-sized logs.
+
+Jud, like every true scout, knew just how to go about starting a fire.
+True, the recent rain had wet pretty much all of the wood, so that a
+tenderfoot would have had a difficult task getting the blaze started,
+though after that trouble had been surmounted it would not be so bad. But
+Jud knew just how to split open a log, and find the dry heart that would
+take fire easily; and in a brief time he had his blaze springing up.
+
+Then others began to bring some of the things ashore, particularly the
+tents, in which they expected to sleep during their stay.
+
+Most of the boys were deeply impressed by the size of both the lake and
+the island; since they had not dreamed that things would be upon such a
+large scale.
+
+Then there was that strange silence, broken only by the constant murmur
+of the water passing out, where the Radway River had its source; and
+perhaps, when a dry spell lowered the water of the lake, even this might
+not be heard.
+
+It seemed to some of the scouts as though they were isolated from all the
+rest of the world, marooned in a desolate region, and with many miles
+between themselves and other human beings.
+
+However, when the white tents began to go up, as the several squads of
+workers took hold in earnest, things began to look more cheerful. There
+is nothing that chases away the "blues" quicker than a cheerful fire, and
+the sight of "homey" tents.
+
+"In the morning, if we feel like it, we can put up a flagstaff in front,
+and fly not only our banner, but Old Glory as well," Paul observed. "And
+now, suppose some of you fellows give me a hand here."
+
+"What you going to do, Paul?" asked Old Dan Tucker, eagerly.
+
+"Begin to get supper," came the answer.
+
+"I'll give you a hand there," said the other.
+
+"Me too," said Nat Smith, who was a clever cook.
+
+And when the odor of coffee began to steal through the camp, the boys
+felt amply repaid for all they had undergone in the rough trip from
+Stanhope. They sniffed the air, and smiled, and seemed ready to declare
+the expedition a great success.
+
+More than that, the cooks being blessed with healthy appetites
+themselves, had cut generous slices from one of the fine hams, and these
+were also on the fire, sizzling away at a great rate, and throwing off
+the most tempting odors imaginable.
+
+It was a happy sight about that time, and showed the best side of camp
+life. All of the boys belonging to the Red Fox Patrol at least, had been
+through the mill before, and knew that there was another side to the
+picture; when the rain descended, and the wind blew with hurricane force,
+possibly tearing the canvas out of their hands, and leaving them exposed
+to the storm, to be soaked through.
+
+But of course they hoped nothing of that sort was going to happen to them
+on this trip. Once a year ought to be enough.
+
+If the season of preparation was delightful, what shall be said of that
+time when the eighteen boys sat around in favorite attitudes, each with a
+cup of steaming coffee beside him, to which he could add sugar and
+condensed milk to suit his taste; while on his knees he held a
+generous-sized tin pannikin, upon which was heaped a mess of friend
+potatoes and ham, besides all the bread he could dispose of?
+
+"This is the stuff; it's what I call living!" Bobolink remarked.
+
+"You never said truer words." mumbled Old Dan Tucker, who was about as
+busy as a beaver, his eyes sparkling with satisfaction.
+
+"One thing sure!" declared Spider; "when Dan stops eating, he'll
+quit living."
+
+"Huh! guess all of us will," added Curly Baxter.
+
+They were in no hurry to finish the feast; and when the end did arrive,
+it would take a microscope to discover any crumbs left over.
+
+"The worst is yet to come," announced Jud, "and that's washing up."
+
+But all these things had been arranged for beforehand, so that in due
+course of time every fellow would have his share of camp duties. Today he
+might have to assist in the cooking; tomorrow help wash dishes; the next
+day be one of the wood-getters; and then perhaps on the fourth blissful
+day, he would be at liberty to just loaf!
+
+And no doubt that last day was the one most of them would be apt to
+enjoy above all else; for otherwise they would hardly have been flesh
+and blood boys.
+
+While those whose duty lay in cleaning up after the meal were engaged,
+some of the others joined Paul in bringing the blankets ashore, and
+distributing them to the various tents.
+
+There were three of the latter, which would allow of six boys to each,
+perhaps a rather "full house"--but then they could curl up and not take
+much room.
+
+"Aren't we going to keep any watch, Paul?" asked Joe Clausin, when later
+on some of the more tired talked of turning in.
+
+"Watch for what?" demanded Bobolink.
+
+"Guess Joe thinks Ted Slavin and his crowd might get over here, and throw
+stones at our tents, like they did once before," suggested Nuthin.
+
+"Well, they do say there's a wild man around here," declared Joe, in a
+half hesitating way; for he was actually ashamed to expose his belief in
+supernatural things for fear of being laughed at.
+
+"Let Mr. Wild Man come around; who cares?" sang out Bobolink. "Why, the
+circuses are always wantin' wild men, you know; and I guess we'd get a
+pretty hefty sum now, if we could capture this wonderful critter that's
+been living here so long covered with the skins of wild beasts he's ate
+up. It's me to hit the rubber pillow I fetched along. And Joe, if you
+want to watch, nobody is going to keep you from doing it"
+
+And with these words Bobolink dodged into the tent that he knew his mess
+belonged to; in which action he was followed by numerous other scouts.
+Joe, finding himself left in the lurch, cast a fearful glance around at
+the heavy growth of timber on one side the camp, the lake being on the
+other; after which he shook his head as though the prospect of sitting
+there by the dying fire did not appeal very much to him--and crawled
+under the flap, too.
+
+Perhaps it could hardly be said that silence rested on the scene; for
+with a dozen and a half boys trying to get to sleep there is always more
+or less horseplay. But an hour later, something like quiet settled down.
+The fire was dying out, too, since they had no reason for keeping it
+going, the night air being balmy.
+
+Midnight came and went, and it must have been toward two o'clock in the
+morning when every boy suddenly sat upright, as though a galvanic shock
+had passed in and out of every tent.
+
+So it had, for the very earth trembled under them, as a terrific
+detonation sounded, just as though a bolt of lightning had struck a
+nearby tree. And some of the scouts were ready to declare that the
+shock had been accompanied by a brilliant electric flash, that almost
+blinded them.
+
+Immediately there began to be an upheaval, as blankets were tossed aside
+and the scouts crawled or scrambled from under, uttering all sorts of
+exclamations, and apparently too dazed to account for the phenomenon.
+
+They began to swarm out of the tents, and loud were the outcries of
+astonishment when they discovered not a cloud as big as a hand in the
+starry heavens.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+WAS IT A BURSTING METEOR?
+
+
+"Who hit me?" exclaimed Bobolink, rubbing his eyes as he gained his feet
+and looked around at the dimly-seen forms of the other scouts; for the
+moon had by now sunk behind the horizon.
+
+"What busted?" demanded Nuthin. "I bet it was that bottle of raspberry
+vinegar my sister put in my knapsack. It's gone sour, and exploded, sure
+as anything."
+
+Strange to say, none of the others even bothered laughing at such a
+foolish remark as this. They stared at the clear sky overhead, and the
+twinkling stars looking down upon them, just as though winking to each
+other, and enjoying the confusion of the valiant scouts.
+
+Even Paul, who generally knew everything, seemed mystified.
+
+"I declare if I can tell what it was," he said upon being appealed to by
+some of the others in the group. "I was sound asleep, like the rest of
+you, when all of a sudden it seemed as if the end of the world had come.
+I felt the ground shake under me and as I opened my eyes it seemed as if
+I was nearly blinded. The flash came and went just like lightning, and
+that bang was what would pass for thunder in a storm; but for the life of
+me I can't see any sign of trouble up there."
+
+"And we don't hear anything more; do we?" demanded Jud.
+
+"Sounded like a big cannon to me," remarked Jack.
+
+"Couldn't be that the State troops are out, and having manoeuvres, with a
+sham battle, could it?" questioned Gusty Bellows.
+
+"Well, hardly, without somebody knowing about it. And they generally take
+up that sort of thing later in the year. There's only one explanation
+that sounds a bit reasonable to me," Paul went on.
+
+"Tell us what that is, then?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"I've heard about meteors falling, and exploding when they hit the
+earth," the scout master went on to say.
+
+"That's right!" echoed Jack; "and say, they're always accompanied by a
+dazzling light, as they shoot through space, burning the air along with
+them. Yes, siree, that must have been a big meteor stone."
+
+"Then it struck the earth right close to our camp, mark me," vowed Jud.
+
+"Ain't I glad it didn't pick out this spot to drop on," crowed
+Nuthin. "Whew! guess we'd have been squashed flatter than that pancake
+you hear about."
+
+"What are meteors made up of--they drop from stars; don't they?"
+asked Bob Tice.
+
+"Oh! there's just millions and billions of 'em flying around loose," said
+Phil Towns, who liked to read of astronomy at times. "Lots of 'em happen
+to get caught in the envelope of air that surrounds the earth. Then they
+fall victims to the force of gravitation, and come plunging down at such
+speed that they do really burn the air, just like Jack said. You see,
+they're made up for the most part of metals, and our old earth draws 'em
+like a monster magnet."
+
+"Is that what shooting stars are?" Bob went on to ask.
+
+"Why, yes, they're really small meteors. We often pass through a mess of
+'em. I've counted hundreds in a single night," Phil continued, always
+willing to give any information he could along his favorite study.
+
+"Well, they say lightning don't strike in the same place twice; and that
+goes with your old buzzing meteors too, I reckon; so what's the use in
+our staying up any longer?" remarked Bobolink, who seemed quite satisfied
+with the explanation Paul had given of the queer noise, and the flash of
+brilliant light.
+
+So they crawled back into their snug nests, and tried to compose
+themselves for sleep. But it is extremely doubtful whether a single one
+of those eighteen boys secured so much as a decent cat-nap between that
+hour and dawn.
+
+Despite their apparent belief in the explanation of the phenomenon
+advanced by Paul, the boys could not get rid of the notion that that
+tremendous crash had something to do with the strange things told about
+the haunted island, and which helped to give it its bad name.
+
+They were up pretty early, too. The first birds were beginning to chirp
+in the brush when figures came crawling out of the tents, with a great
+stretching of arms, and long yawns.
+
+Then the lake tempted many of the boys, and a great splashing announced
+that those who could swim were enjoying a morning dip while others were
+taking a lesson in learning the first rudiments in the art; for Paul
+wanted every scout in Stanhope Troop to be able to swim and dive before
+the Fall came on.
+
+The scout master himself watched the proceedings, hardly able to get his
+own dip because of his anxiety concerning those who, for the time being,
+had been placed in his charge.
+
+This thing of being responsible for seventeen lively boys is not all that
+it may be cracked up to be; especially if the acting scout master is a
+conscientious chap, alive to his duties. Paul felt the weight of the
+load; but he did not shrink.
+
+Breakfast was presently under way, and nobody found any fault when
+Bobolink announced that he meant to instruct Nat Smith and another boy
+just how to go about making those delicious flapjacks for which he
+himself had become famous.
+
+In the cooking contests, at the time the Stanhope Troop carried off their
+banner in competition with the troops of Manchester and Aldine, Bobolink
+had easily outclassed all rivals when it came to the science of camp
+cookery, and his flapjacks were admitted without a peer, so that ever
+since, when the boys had an outing, there was always a shout when it was
+found that Bobolink was willing to get a mess of cakes ready for their
+attention.
+
+Although most of the boys had looked a bit peaked, and even haggard, when
+they first issued from the tents, this had long since vanished. The
+frolic in the cool water, and now this feast in the open, proved the
+finest tonics possible.
+
+They were now filled with new energy and pluck. Nobody dreamed of being
+frightened away from camp by such a little thing as a meteor bursting
+near by, or any other strange happening. Perhaps, when night came around
+again, this buoyant feeling might take wings, and fly away; but then,
+there would be fourteen and more hours before darkness again assailed
+them, and what was the use fretting over things so far removed?
+
+All had made up their minds to do a lot of things while up at camp,
+according to their various tastes. One began to look around for subjects
+he could take snapshots of, having a liking for photography. Another got
+a companion to take up a station along the shore, so that they could
+exchange messages, using the flags and the code.
+
+Then there were several who evinced a decided interest in finding the
+tracks of wild animals, like a raccoon, or a rabbit, or even a squirrel,
+when nothing better presented itself. These they minutely examined, and
+applied all sorts of theories in forming the story of the trail. In many
+cases these proved very entertaining indeed, and Paul was always pleased,
+with Jack's assistance, to pass on such things, being adapted through
+practical experience to correct errors, and set the beginner straight on
+certain facts that he had mixed.
+
+There were numerous other things to do also. One boy loved to hunt wild
+flowers, and as soon as he could coax a mate to accompany him, since Paul
+would not allow the scouts to go off alone, he busied himself in the
+undergrowth, looking in mossy spots for some of the shy blossoms that
+appealed to his collecting taste.
+
+Another seemed to have a love for geology. He wanted to find specimens
+of every sort of stone, and hinted of certain stories of mining having
+been carried on in these regions a century or two ago. But as he did not
+find any ore that contained precious minerals in paying quantities,
+during their stay on Cedar Island, the chances are that his father will
+still have to go right along paying his bills, even after he gets into
+college later in life.
+
+The morning was slipping away fast, and they had not found any better
+place to settle on for a camp. It seemed that, by the merest chance, they
+had hit upon the best spot for a short stay on the island.
+
+Three of the boys wandered along the shore, fishing. Paul had seen them
+pull in several good-sized bass, and began to make up his mind that after
+all they were going to have a fish dinner, if the luck held. He was even
+debating whether he dared leave camp for a while, and taking his jointed
+rod, joined the trio who had wandered around the bend of the eastern
+shore of the island; for Paul certainly did love to feel a lively fish at
+the end of his line, and could not think of leaving Lake Tokala without
+giving its finny inhabitants a chance to get acquainted with him.
+
+Just as he had about decided that he could be spared for the hour that
+still remained until noon, Paul thought he heard a shout. Now, the
+scouts had more than a few times given tongue during the morning, when
+engaged in some boisterous game; but it struck Paul, whose nerves were
+always on the alert for such things, while this responsibility rested on
+his shoulders, that there was certainly a note, as of alarm, about this
+particular outcry.
+
+It seemed to come from around that bend, too, where he had seen the three
+boys disappear. Even as he looked in that direction, he saw something
+come in sight among the rocks that lay so thickly around. It was Gusty
+Bellows, one of the anglers; yes, and there was Little Billie just behind
+him, taking great leaps that promised to speedily leave the other far in
+the lurch.
+
+Paul's heart seemed to stand still. Where was Jud, who had been in the
+company of the two? What could have happened?
+
+The scout master dropped his rod, which he had been in the act of
+jointing, and started on a run to meet the two fishermen; for he
+could hear them shouting, though unable to distinguish just what they
+were saying.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE FOOTPRINTS IN THE SAND
+
+
+Then Paul felt a sensation of sudden relief pass over him. He had
+discovered a third figure running, some distance in the rear of the other
+scouts; and when he recognized this as Jud Elderkin, he knew that
+whatever might have happened to frighten the fishermen, at least none of
+them seemed to be in any immediate danger.
+
+Of course, by this time scouts were springing up all around, and all
+heading toward the common centre, which would be where Paul and the
+fishermen must meet.
+
+Little Billie was the first one to arrive, for, being possessed of long
+legs, in spite of his name, he could get over ground at a prodigious
+rate, given cause. And judging from his ashen face, he had plenty of that
+right now.
+
+"What is it?" demanded Paul, as the other came panting along.
+
+"Wild man!" gasped Little Billie.
+
+"Whee!" exclaimed Bobolink, who had managed to get near enough to catch
+what was said.
+
+"'Fraid he nabbed poor Jud!" said Gusty, now reaching the spot, and just
+about at his last gasp.
+
+"Not much he didn't, because there he comes now!" ejaculated Bobolink.
+
+"Oh! mercy!" exclaimed Little Billie, evidently thinking he meant
+the wild man.
+
+"It's Jud, and all to the good; but even he looks white around the gills,
+too, Paul. They must have seen _something_, to give 'em all such a
+scare," Bobolink went on to say.
+
+"You just bet we did; ask Jud!" declared Gusty, just as though he
+imagined the others might question their veracity, but would believe the
+patrol leader, who was now coming along with great leaps and bounds.
+
+And presently Jud Elderkin halted at the group. He looked first at Gusty,
+and then at Little Billie. There was a question in his eye.
+
+"Sure, we saw it, too, Jud!" declared Gusty, holding up his quivering
+hand just as though he were in the witness box; but then, as his father
+was a lawyer, possibly Gusty often experimented on himself, since he
+meant to either take up the same pursuit in life, or give his magnificent
+voice a chance to earn him a living in the role of an auctioneer.
+
+"Me too; and say, wasn't it a terror, though?" the tall scout declared.
+
+"Well, I didn't wait long enough to have any words with the Thing,"
+admitted Jud. "You see, I happened to be further away from home than the
+other fellows, and I knew I'd have more space to cover. So, after letting
+out a yell to sort of warn 'em, why I just put for cover. Never ran
+faster even between bases. Thought he'd get me sure before I rounded that
+bend; but when I looked back, blessed if he wasn't grabbin' up our
+strings of fish like fun, and making off with 'em. I don't know right now
+whether I'm just scared, or only boiling mad. Tell me, somebody!"
+
+"A little of both, I guess!" declared Bobolink, grinning.
+
+"Say, then, it wasn't just a big yarn about that wild man, after all; was
+it?" said Tom Betts.
+
+"How about that, Little Billie; did you see him?" demanded Jud.
+
+"Did I? Think I was runnin' for my health? Why, he looked all of seven
+feet high to me, and covered with long hair. Talk about your Robinson
+Crusoe making him a coat of an old nanny goat, that feller was in the
+same class; eh, Gusty?" loudly asserted the tall boy.
+
+"I saw him, all right, don't you forget it," declared the one
+addressed. "And I certain sure thought he was after _me_. But if Jud
+says he took our nice string of bass, why that changes the thing, and
+makes me mad as hops. Think of us workin' all that time, only to fill
+up a crazy crank. Next time I go fishin' I'm meanin' to sit home, and
+do it off the door step."
+
+Paul was revolving many things in his mind and trying to understand.
+
+"I want several of you to go back with me," he said, presently; "the rest
+head for camp or go about whatever you were doing."
+
+"Want to take a squint at his tracks; eh, Paul?" asked Jud.
+
+"No harm done if we do," remarked Bobolink, thus declaring his intention
+of being one of those who were to accompany the leader.
+
+Jack also went along, and Jud, making four in all; but the last mentioned
+refused to budge a foot until he had obtained a healthy-looking club,
+which he tucked under his arm.
+
+"Now, I want to warn that same critter to keep his distance from me," Jud
+said, as he led off with long strides. "He gave me one scare, and I
+promise you that if he tries that game again there's going to be a warm
+time around these regions. But I reckon he's satisfied with all our nice
+fish, and we won't see anything of him until he gets good and hungry
+again. Wonder if he eats 'em raw, Chinese fashion, or has some way of
+making a fire?"
+
+"What's that over yonder?" asked Paul.
+
+"Where?" gasped Jud, brandishing his club.
+
+"Looks like a string of fish; and so, you see, the wild man didn't get
+_all_ you fellows caught. We'll just pick that lot up, and trot along,"
+observed Paul.
+
+"He got mine, all right; these must have been what one of the other
+fellows had. You see, they were so badly rattled they just cut and run,
+and held on to their rods only. Yep, there's a second string of fish, and
+that accounts for both; but you needn't think mine'll be laying around,
+for he got 'em.
+
+"Well, show me just about where he was when you saw him last,"
+Paul demanded.
+
+Jud could easily do this. They found the print of human feet in the
+earth. It must have been an unusually large foot that made the marks; and
+this tallied with what had been said about the height of the wild man.
+
+"You're not goin' to try and follow him, I hope, Paul?" asked Jud,
+uneasily, as if he drew the line at certain things, ready and willing as
+he might be to back the scout master in most ventures.
+
+"Oh! it wouldn't pay us," retorted Paul. "As one of the boys said, we
+haven't lost any wild man; and so far as I know there's no one missing
+around Stanhope, so it can't be some man from there. I think we'd do well
+to mind our own business in this affair; don't you, fellows?"
+
+"Yes, I do," replied Jack, "but I was wondering whether this thing will
+crop up to give us a heap of bother while we're camping up here."
+
+"How's that?" asked Bobolink. "There's only one thing that gives me any
+carking care, and you know what that is, Jack, old boy. If I only knew
+about those boxes, I'd be so much easier in my mind."
+
+"Well," said Paul, "if this crazy man would steal our fish, he'd just as
+lief take anything else we've got that's good to eat. When he smells our
+coffee cooking it'll call up some long-forgotten craving for the Java
+bean; and first thing you know he'll be invading our camp every night,
+hunting around for any old thing he can steal."
+
+"Now, I like that," said Bobolink, satirically. "Nice prospect, ain't it,
+not to be able to step out of the tent of nights, without bumping noses
+with that awful Man Friday in wild animal shows? P'raps in self-defense
+we may have to do that grand capture act after all, Paul."
+
+"Well, there's nothing more to learn here, so we might as well turn back
+again. As I don't see anything of your string of fish, Jud, I calculate
+that he must have gotten away with 'em. We can add a few more to these,
+and have enough for a regular feast. Come on, boys, back to camp for us."
+
+Some way or other it was noticed that during the early afternoon most of
+the boys hung around the camp. It seemed to have an especial attraction
+for them all. One busied himself sorting over the collection of the
+morning in the way of plants. A second was polishing up certain specimens
+of quartz he had found, after cracking some of the round stones that had
+washed on the island during a flood, possibly many years back. A third
+developed his pictures, having brought along his daylight tank.
+
+And so it went, until Paul smiled to observe what a busy colony he had in
+his charge. On his part, he took a rod and line, with some bait, and went
+off with Jack to add to the number of fish, so that there would be enough
+for all at supper time. And as the others had fished in one direction,
+Paul and his chum decided to move in the other.
+
+They put in an hour with very fair success, considering that it was not
+the best part of the day for fishing.
+
+Of course, as they walked along, keeping close to one another,
+occasionally Paul and Jack would chat on various subjects. They also kept
+their eyes open, not wishing to be taken by surprise, should that hairy
+individual, who seemed to have a craving for fish, rush out at them.
+
+And more than that, Paul had copied the example set by Jud. It was
+fashionable about that time not to walk forth without a nice little Irish
+shillelah under one's arm, with which a head could be made to sing
+unmercifully, in case of necessity.
+
+Paul had just had a pretty lively time with a good fish, and had
+succeeded in bringing his prize to land, when he happened to look down at
+the beach on which he was standing. Bobolink and Tom Betts were coming
+along, as though curious to see how fast the stock of provisions for
+supper was increasing.
+
+So Paul bent down to examine something that had caught his attention. The
+other three coming up, Jack having joined Bobolink and Tom, found the
+scout master still on his hands and knees.
+
+"Hello! found something, have you?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"Mebbe the footprints of the ghost!" chuckled Tom, meaning to be
+humorous.
+
+But Jack saw that his chum was very serious; and as he dropped down
+beside Paul, he let his eyes fall upon the sand.
+
+"What's this, Paul?" he remarked, immediately. "Looks like the prow of a
+rowboat had been pulled up here--why, that's a dead certainty, because
+look at the plain prints of boots here, and several different kinds,
+too. Shows that somebody landed here on the island; and Paul, it must
+have been _after_ that rain storm, for these marks don't seem to be
+washed, as they would be if the rain had beat down on them. What in the
+world d'ye suppose it means? Are there people on this queer old Cedar
+Island? If there are, who can they be, and why should they hide from
+everybody like this?"
+
+As Jack said this he looked up. Bobolink and Tom were staring at the
+plain marks in the sand, with wonderment written on their faces; and even
+Paul shook his head.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+TRYING TO FIGURE IT ALL OUT
+
+
+"We'll have to look into this thing," said Paul, finally, seeing that his
+three chums were waiting for an opinion from the one they looked up to as
+their leader.
+
+"But what I said was pretty close to the truth; wasn't it, Paul?"
+Jack asked.
+
+"Every word of it" came the ready response, for Paul was always willing
+to give every fellow his meed of praise. "The only trouble is, it stops
+right where you left off. None of us can say a word after that."
+
+"How many men were there in the crowd?" asked Tom Betts.
+
+"I could make out four," replied Jack; "you take another look, Paul, and
+see if that's correct."
+
+"I know it is," remarked the scout master, nodding, "because I counted
+them before I called you. And they seemed to lift something heavy from
+the boat, which they carried away into the bushes here."
+
+"Whee! something heavy, eh?" burst out the impetuous Bobolink; "and they
+carried it between them, two and two; was it, Paul?"
+
+"Why, yes, two on each side; if you look close, you can see where they
+stepped into each other's footprints," assented the patrol leader.
+
+"That's so," agreed Bobolink, after bending down hastily; "just
+like--er--you've seen the pall-bearers at a funeral!"
+
+"Oh!" exclaimed Tom, turning a little white at the idea.
+
+"Of course, that isn't saying it _was_ a funeral," remarked Bobolink,
+hastily, as he noticed that Paul glanced at Jack, and the two shook their
+heads a trifle, as though the idea failed to impress them favorably. "But
+whatever it was, they seemed to find it heavy, the way their toes dug
+into the sand here."
+
+"Yes, it was heavy, all right," admitted Paul. "I think, from the way the
+rear men stepped into the prints of the one up head, that whatever they
+were carrying could not have been very lengthy; in fact, it must have
+been short, but rather broad."
+
+"Well, that's a smart idea of yours, Paul, and I c'n see how you hit on
+it," Bobolink was quick to say, with a look of sincere admiration.
+
+"But whatever do you reckon would bring four men up here to this lonely
+island, carrying some heavy object in a rowboat?" Tom Betts went on.
+
+"That's where we have to do our guessing," Paul replied. "We don't know;
+and as they haven't been obliging enough to write it out, and fasten the
+card to a tree, why, we've just got to put on our thinking caps, as my
+mother would say."
+
+"Well, we've had some experience in the past with hoboes; think they
+could be a batch of Weary Willies, Paul?" remarked Tom Betts.
+
+"I'm not ready to say off-hand that they're not," replied the other,
+slowly; "but it hardly seems likely. In the first place, every one of
+them seemed to be wearing sound shoes. Did you ever know four tramps
+to do that?"
+
+"Well, I should say not," replied Bobolink, scornfully. "It'd be a wonder
+if one out of four had shoes that'd hold on without a lot of rope. You
+clinched that idea the first thing, Paul."
+
+"Then what'd you say they were?" demanded Tom.
+
+Bobolink rubbed his chin reflectively.
+
+"A heap of difference between plain tramps, and the kind they call yeggs;
+isn't there, Paul?" he asked, presently.
+
+"Everybody says so," came the answer. "Yegg-men are supposed to be the
+toughest members of the tramp tribe. They're really burglars or
+safe-blowers, who pretend to be hoboes so they can prowl around country
+towns, looking up easy snaps about the banks and stores that ought to be
+good picking. And so you think these four men might belong to that crowd,
+do you, Bobolink?"
+
+"It's barely possible, anyhow," the one addressed went on, doggedly. "And
+I was just trying to remember if I'd heard of any robbery lately. There
+was a store broke into over at Marshall two weeks ago, and the thieves
+carried off a lot of stuff. But seems to me, the men got nabbed later on.
+I'm a little hazy about it, though. But supposin' now, that these four
+men had made a rich haul somewhere, and wanted to hide their stuff in a
+good place, could they find a better one than up here on Cedar Island?"
+
+The other three exchanged glances.
+
+"I guess that's about right," admitted Tom.
+
+"It's certainly quiet enough to suit anybody; and chances are they
+wouldn't be disturbed in a coon's age," declared Jack. "Our coming here
+was a freak. It mightn't happen again in many years."
+
+"And this old island's already got a bad name; hasn't it?"
+Bobolink went on.
+
+"That would help keep people away," admitted Paul. "I've heard of men
+coming up in this region winters, trapping the muskrats that swarm in the
+marshes; but up to cranberry picking time it's almost deserted."
+
+"Jack, you must have had an idea, too?" remarked Bobolink.
+
+"Well, I did; but perhaps the rest of you'll only give me the laugh if I
+mention it," replied Jack.
+
+"All the same, it isn't fair to keep anything back," Tom declared. "My
+guess didn't pan out much, and you couldn't have worse luck than that.
+So tell us."
+
+"Yes, go on, Jack, and give us the benefit of your think-box. I've known
+you to get away up head more'n a few times, when it came to a live race.
+And mebbe some of the rest of us mightn't think so badly of your idea as
+you do yourself," and as he said this Bobolink sat down on the sand to
+listen, all the while eyeing those mysterious tracks as though he half
+expected them to give tongue, and tell the true story of their origin.
+
+"Oh! well, that seems only fair, so here goes," Jack began. "Somehow I
+happened to remember that once on a time I read about some counterfeiters
+who had their nest in an old haunted mill, away up in the country."
+
+"Whee!" Bobolink said, sitting bolt upright.
+
+"None of the country people would ever go near the place, you see; and
+when a light happened to be seen in it at night time, they talked about
+the ghost walking, and all that," Jack continued.
+
+"Huh! that must have been when the boss was paying off his hands,"
+chuckled Bobolink. "I always heard that was the time the ghost walked."
+
+"In this case the truth was only found out by some accident," Jack went
+on to say, without paying any heed to the interruption. "I think a hunter
+was overtaken by darkness, having lost himself in the woods. He was a
+stranger, and had never heard about the haunted mill. So, seeing a light,
+he went up to ask his way, or if he could get a chance of a bed that
+night, I forget which. He saw enough to give him a suspicion; and when he
+did get back to the tavern he was stopping at, he sent word to the
+Government authorities. A raid resulted, and they caught four
+counterfeiters hard at work."
+
+"_Four,_ you said, Jack!" echoed Tom.
+
+"Yes, just the same number there seems to be here; but then that's only a
+coincidence, because those others are serving ten-year sentences in the
+penitentiary. Now, you see, I guess the fact of Cedar Island being said
+to have a real ghost got me into the idea of thinking about that story I
+read in the paper. Of course it's a silly idea all around."
+
+"Well, I don't know," said Paul, slowly.
+
+"You don't mean to say you think it might happen that way here?" demanded
+Jack, seeming to be the only one desirous of "shooting holes" in the
+proposition he had himself advanced, as Bobolink expressed it later on.
+
+"It's possible," Paul said, simply.
+
+"Huh! for my part," spoke up Bobolink, "I think it's more than that,
+even. If you asked me straight now, I'd be inclined to say it's
+probable."
+
+"Same here," remarked Tom Betts, eagerly.
+
+Jack laughed as if pleased.
+
+"I declare, I really expected to hear you knock my idea all to flinders,"
+he remarked.
+
+"But what under the sun could they be carrying in that big box?" asked
+Tom Betts.
+
+"Box!" muttered Bobolink, frowning, as though the word recalled to his
+mind a matter that had been puzzling him greatly of late; but he did not
+think to say anything further on that subject.
+
+"Well, sometimes machinery comes that way," suggested Paul. "If these
+strange men did turn out to be what Jack said, they might be getting
+a press of some kind up here, to do their printing with. I never saw
+an outfit, but seems to me they must have such a thing, to make the
+bogus bills."
+
+"That's right," added Tom. "I read all about it not long ago. Wallace
+Carberry's so interested in everything about books and printing, that he
+clips all sorts of articles. And this one described a kind of press that
+had been taken in a raid on some bogus money-makers. Yep, it must have
+been machinery they were lugging off here. Whew! just to think of us
+bein' mixed up in such a business. I wonder, now, if the Government ever
+pays a reward for information about such things."
+
+"Oh! rats! that's the last thing a scout should bother his head about,"
+said Bobolink, scornfully. "He ought to see his duty, and do it. Though,
+of course, if a nice little present happens along afterwards, why, I
+guess there's no law against a scout acceptin' it; eh, Paul?"
+
+"Certainly not," replied the other, "you've got the idea down pretty
+fine, Bobolink. But let's see if we can guess anything else. Then we'd
+better go back to camp, and start the rest of the fellows thinking about
+it. Perhaps Jud or Andy or Nuthin might dig up something that never
+occurred to any of us."
+
+But although they talked it over for some little time they did not seem
+able to conjure up any new idea; everything advanced proved to hinge upon
+one of the explanations already spoken of. And in the end they were
+forced to admit that they had apparently exhausted the subject.
+
+"Let's pick up our fish, and stroll back, fellows," proposed Paul,
+finally.
+
+"Lucky to have any fish, with that hog around," remarked Bobolink.
+
+"Now you're meaning the wild man, I take it?" said Jack.
+
+"No other; the fellow that drops in on you when you ain't expectin'
+company, and just swipes your string of fish like he did Jud's. I might
+'a thought Jud was giving us a yarn to explain why he didn't have
+anything to show for his morning's work; but both Little Billie and Gusty
+saw the same thing. Say, that's another link we got to straighten out.
+What's a crazy man doing up here; and is he in the same bunch that made
+these tracks?"
+
+"That's something we don't know," admitted Paul.
+
+"But we mean to find out," asserted Bobolink, with a determined snapping
+of his jaws.
+
+"Perhaps so--anyhow, we'll make a brave try for it," Paul declared.
+
+"He wasn't one of these four, that's flat," said Tom Betts. "We all saw
+what a big foot the wild man had; and besides, he goes without shoes."
+
+"Glad to see you noticed all that," commented Paul, who always felt
+pleased when any of the troop exhibited powers of observation, since it
+proved that the lessons he was endeavoring to impress upon their minds
+had taken root.
+
+They turned their faces toward the camp, and Paul made sure to pick up
+the fish he and Jack had caught.
+
+"With what we'e already cleaned, they'll make a fine mess for the
+crowd," he remarked, pointing out an unusually big fellow that had given
+him all the fun he wanted, before consenting to be dragged ashore.
+
+"I notice that you both kill your fish as you get 'em," remarked Tom.
+
+"I wouldn't think of doing anything else," replied Jack. "It only takes a
+smart rap with a club on the head to end their sufferings. I'd hate to
+think of even a fish dying by inches, and flapping all over the boat or
+the ground, as it gasps its life away. That's one of the things scouts
+are taught--to be humane sportsmen, giving the game a chance, whether
+fish, flesh or fowl, and not inflicting any unnecessary suffering."
+
+"Wonder if anything's happened in camp since we came away; because
+Bobolink and I have been gone nearly an hour," remarked Tom Betts, to
+change the subject; for his conscience reproved him with regard to the
+matter Jack was speaking about.
+
+"What makes you think that?" asked Paul, suspiciously.
+
+"Oh! nothing; only things seem to be on the jump with us right now; and a
+fellow can't turn around without bumping into a wild man, or some bogus
+money-makers, it seems. P'raps the ghost'll show up next. Listen! wasn't
+that somebody trying to blow your bugle, Bobolink, that you left hung up
+in the tent?"
+
+"It sure was, for a fact. Let's start on a run, fellows. Mebbe they've
+gone and grabbed that wild man! P'raps he was bent on carryin' off the
+whole outfit this time. You never can tell what a crazy man'll do next;
+that's the hard part of being a keeper in a queer house, where they keep
+a lot of that kind; anyhow a man told me that once who'd been there. But
+listen to that scout trying to sound the recall, would you? Whoop her up,
+boys; there's _something_ happened, as sure as you live!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+ORDERED OFF
+
+
+It was about four o'clock in the afternoon of this, the first day of
+their intended stay on Cedar Island, when Paul and his three comrades
+came running around the bend of the shore above the camp, and saw some of
+the scouts beckoning wildly to them.
+
+"They've gone and grabbed him, sure as shooting!" gasped Bobolink,
+exultantly.
+
+But Jack and Paul noted that while there teemed to be a cluster of the
+boys no strange form could be seen among them. In fact, they appeared to
+be greatly excited over something Jud Elderkin was holding.
+
+And in this manner then did the quartette reach the camp.
+
+"Where is he; got him tied up good and hard?" demanded Bobolink, speaking
+with difficulty, from lack of breath.
+
+Nobody paid the slightest attention to what he was saying; and so
+Bobolink, happening to notice that it was Curly Baxter who had been
+taking liberties with his precious bugle, quietly possessed himself of
+it, and examined it carefully, to make sure that it had not been dented.
+
+"Take a look at this, Paul," said Jud, as he held out the fluttering
+piece of paper that had evidently caused all the excitement.
+
+Written upon this the scout master saw only a few words, but they
+possessed considerable significance, when viewed in the light of the
+strange happenings of the recent past.
+
+"_Leave this island at once_!"
+
+Just five words in all. Whoever wrote that order must be a man who did
+not believe in wasting anything. There was no penalty attached, and they
+were at liberty to believe anything they chose; just the plain command to
+get out, and somehow it seemed more impressive because of its brevity.
+
+Paul looked at Jack, and then around at the anxious faces of the other
+scouts. He saw only blank ignorance there. Nobody could imagine what this
+strange order meant. The island might have an owner, but at the best it
+was only a worthless bit of property, and their camping on its shore for
+a week could not be considered in the light of trespass.
+
+"Where did you get this, Jud?" asked the scout master.
+
+"Why, Old Dan Tucker brought it to me," replied the leader of the Gray
+Fox Patrol, promptly.
+
+"And where did _you_ find it, Dan?" continued Paul, turning on the scout
+in question, who seemed only too willing to tell all he knew--which, it
+turned out, was precious little at best.
+
+"Why, you see, I had a dispute with Nuthin about the number of hams
+fetched on the trip. He vowed there was two, and I said three, countin'
+the one we'd cut into last night. So to prove it, I just happened to step
+into the tent where we've got some of the grub piled up. It was three,
+all right, just as I said. But I found this paper pinned to one of the
+whole hams, which, you know, are sewed up in covers right from the
+packers. I couldn't make out what it meant. First I thought Nuthin was
+playin' a joke on me; but he denied it. So I took the paper to Jud,
+seein' that you were away, Paul."
+
+"It was pinned to one of the hams, was it?" asked the scout
+master, frowning.
+
+"Sure, and the pin's still stickin' in it," answered Dan, positively.
+
+Paul looked around.
+
+"I want to settle one thing right at the start, before we bother any more
+about this matter," he remarked. "Did any one of you write this, or have
+you ever seen it before Dan brought it to Jud?"
+
+"He showed it to me," exclaimed Nuthin; "but it was the first time I
+ever glimpsed that paper or writin', Paul, I give you my word."
+
+"If anybody else has seen it before, I want him to hold up his hand,"
+continued the scout master, knowing how prone boys are to play pranks.
+
+The boys glanced at each other; but not a single hand went up.
+
+"Well, that settles one thing, then," declared Paul. "This note came
+from some one not belonging to our camp. He must have crawled into the
+tent from the rear, taking advantage of our being busy. Yes, there's a
+bunch of scrub close enough to give him more or less shelter, if he
+crawled on all fours. Let's see if one or two of the tent pins haven't
+been drawn up."
+
+Followed by the rest, Paul strode over to the tent where a quantity of
+the provisions were kept. Entering this, he quickly saw that it was
+exactly as he had suggested. Three of the tent pins, which the boys had
+pounded down with the camp axe, had been pulled up, and this slack
+allowed the intruder to crawl under the now loose canvas.
+
+"I can see the place he shuffled along, and where his toes dug into the
+earth," declared Jack, as he bent over.
+
+"We'll try and follow it up presently, and see where he got on his feet
+to move off," Paul remarked. "I'd like to find out whether his shoes
+make a mark anything like some of those we were looking at up the
+shore, Jack."
+
+"Whew!" exclaimed Bobolink, who was again deeply interested in what was
+going on, since he had found his precious bugle unharmed.
+
+"Let's look at that paper again," resumed Paul. "The writing was done
+with a fountain pen, I should say. That seems to tell that the owner was
+no common hobo. And the writing is as clear as the print in our copybooks
+at school. The man who did that was a penman, believe me. 'Leave this
+island at once!' Just like that, short and crisp. Not a threat about what
+will happen if we don't, you see; we're expected to just imagine all
+sorts of terrible things, unless we skip out right away. One thing sure,
+Jud, your wild man never wrote that note, or even pinned it on our ham,
+because the crawler wore shoes."
+
+"That's right," muttered Jud, his face betraying the admiration he felt
+for the scout master who knew so well how to patch things together, so
+that they seemed to be almost as plain as print.
+
+"Now, the rest of you just stay around while I take Jack and Bobolink
+with me along this trail. We want to settle one thing, and that'll come
+when we hit the place where this party got up on his feet to move off."
+
+So saying, Paul himself got down and deliberately crawled under the
+canvas the same way the trespasser had. Jack and Bobolink hastened to
+follow his example, only too well pleased to be selected to accompany
+the leader.
+
+It was no great task to follow the marks made by the crawling man. His
+toes had dug into the soil, going and coming, for apparently he had used
+the same trail both ways.
+
+"Here we are, boys; now, take a look!" said Paul, presently.
+
+They were by this time in the midst of the timber with which this end of
+the island was covered. Glimpses of the tents could be seen between the
+trees; but any intruder might feel himself reasonably justified in rising
+to his full height when he had made a point so well screened from
+inquisitive eyes.
+
+This man had done so, at any rate. The plain print of his shoes was
+visible in a number of places. Both Jack and Bobolink gave utterance to
+exclamations as soon as they saw these.
+
+"One of the four, that's dead sure!" the former declared, positively.
+
+"I'll be badgered if it ain't!" muttered Bobolink, staring at the tracks.
+
+"So you see, we've settled one thing right at the start," said Paul.
+
+"That's what we have," observed Bobolink. "It's those fellows who carried
+the heavy load from the rowboat, after landin' on the island, after the
+rain storm, that want our room more'n our company. The nerve of that
+bunch to tell us to clear out, when chances are we've got just as much
+right here as they have--p'raps a heap sight more."
+
+"That doesn't sound much like you wanted to make a change of base,
+Bobolink?" remarked Paul, smiling.
+
+"No more do I," quickly replied the other. "I'm not used to bein' ordered
+around as if I was a slave. What if there are four of them, aren't
+eighteen husky scouts equal to such a crowd? No, siree, if you left it to
+me, I'd say stick it out till the last horn blows. Give 'em the defi
+right from the shoulder. Tell 'em to go hang, for all we care. We c'n
+take care of ourselves, mebbe; and mind our own business in the bargain."
+
+"But it's something else that makes you want to stay?" Paul suggested.
+
+"How well you know my cut, Paul," declared the other. "You reckon I never
+can stand a mystery. It gets on my nerves, keeps me awake nights, and
+plays hob with my think-box all the time. Now, there was those boxes--but
+I guess I'll try and forget all about that matter now, because we've got
+a sure enough puzzle to solve right on our hands. Who are these four men;
+what are they hiding on Cedar Island for; why should they want to chase
+us away if they weren't afraid we'd find out _somethin_' they're a-doin'
+here, that ain't just accordin' to the law?"
+
+"You've got it pretty straight, Bobolink," admitted Paul. "But since
+we've learned all we wanted to find out, suppose we go back to the rest
+of the boys. We must talk this thing over, and decide what's to be done."
+
+"Do you mean about skipping out, Paul?" Bobolink exclaimed. "Oh! I hope
+now, you won't do anything like that. I'd feel dreadfully mean to sneak
+away. Always did hate to see a cur dog do that, with his tail between
+his legs."
+
+"Still, it might seem best to leave here by dark," said Paul.
+
+Something in his manner gave Jack a clue as to the meaning back of these
+words. He knew the scout master better than did any other fellow in the
+troop, and was accustomed to reading his motives in his look or manner.
+
+"I take it that means we might _pretend_ to clear out, and come back
+under cover of the night, to make another camp; eh, Paul?" Jack now
+remarked, insinuatingly.
+
+"That was what I had in mind," admitted the other; "but of course it'll
+be up to the boys to settle such a question. I believe in every fellow
+having a voice in things that have to do with the general business of
+the camp. But majority rules when once the vote is taken--stay, or go
+for good."
+
+"Glad to hear you say so," ventured Bobolink. "Because here's three votes
+that will be cast for sticking it out; and if I know anything about Jud
+and Nuthin and Bluff, together with several more, the majority will want
+to stick. But I mean to give them a hint that we think that way. Several
+weak-kneed brothers are always ready to vote the way the leaders do. When
+the scout master takes snuff they start to sneezing right away."
+
+"And for that very reason, Bobolink, I don't want you to say a word in
+advance to any of the fellows. When we have a vote, it should be the free
+opinion of every scout, without his being influenced by another. But what
+do you think of the idea, Jack?"
+
+"I think it's just great," answered his chum. "And by the way, if we
+should conclude to come back to the island again in the night, I know the
+finest kind of a place where we could hide the motorboats."
+
+"Where is that?" asked the scout master, quickly.
+
+"You haven't been around on the side of the island where the shore curves
+into a little bay, like. The trees grow so close that their branches
+overhang the water. If the boats were left in there, and some green stuff
+drawn around them, I don't believe they'd ever be noticed, unless some
+one was hunting every foot of the island over for them."
+
+"Yes, I think I know where you mean," said Paul. "I wasn't down by the
+little inlet you speak of; but back on the shore there's a dandy place
+among the rocks and trees, where we could pitch a new camp, and keep
+pretty well hidden, unless we happened to make a lot of noise, which
+we won't do if we can help it But everything depends on how the boys
+look at it."
+
+"Anyhow," said Bobolink, resolutely; "I feel that we ought to put it up
+to them that way; tell 'em how easy it will be to screen the boats, and
+have a hidden camp. You'll let me tell about that, Paul, I hope, even if
+I mustn't say you mean to vote to come back?"
+
+"I suppose that would be fair enough, because we ought to hold up our
+side of the question," the scout master replied, as they drew near the
+place where the three tents stood, and several groups of chattering
+scouts could be seen, doubtless earnestly discussing this mysterious
+thing that had come about; for, of course, Tom Betts had already told all
+about the suspicious tracks of the four men who had carried a heavy
+burden into the brush.
+
+They looked eagerly toward the advancing three, as though expecting that
+Paul would now take them fully into his confidence.
+
+This he proceeded to do without further delay; and it was worth while
+observing the various shades of emotion that flitted across the faces of
+the listeners while the scout master was talking. Some seemed alarmed,
+others disposed to be provoked, while not a few, Bobolink noted with
+secret glee, allowed a frown to mark their foreheads, as though they were
+growing angry at being so summarily ordered off the island by these
+unknown men, who did not even have the decency to present their command
+of dismissal in person.
+
+He knew these fellows could be counted on to vote the right way when the
+question came up as to what they should do.
+
+When the entire thing had been explained, so that they all understood it,
+Paul asked for a vote as to whether they clear out altogether, or appear
+to do so, only to come back again.
+
+And, just as the sanguine Bobolink had expected, it resulted in thirteen
+declaring it to be their idea that they should come back, and try to find
+out what all these queer goings-on meant. When the result of the vote was
+made known, even the five who had voted to go moved that it be made
+unanimous.
+
+Perhaps they came to the conclusion that since a return was decided on it
+would be safer to be with the rest on the haunted island, than off by
+themselves in a lone tent on the distant shore, where no assistance could
+reach them.
+
+"Well, we'd better have an early supper, then, and get away; or since it
+is getting dark now, perhaps we'll have to put off the eating part until
+later," Paul suggested.
+
+"Any old time will do for that," declared Bobolink, carelessly, whereupon
+Old Dan Tucker gave him a look of dismay, and sadly shook his head, as
+though he did not indorse such a foolish theory at all.
+
+So, when the others were carrying things to the boats, and showing
+considerable nervousness while doing it, Old Dan managed to fill his
+pockets with crackers, which he hoped might stave off starvation for a
+little while at least.
+
+Acting on the suggestion of Jack, the scouts gave all sorts of
+exhibitions of alarm as they busied themselves taking down the tents, and
+loading their traps aboard the two motorboats. Every now and then one of
+them would point somewhere up or down the shore, as though he thought he
+saw signs of the enemy coming, whereupon a knot of the boys would gather,
+and stare, and then scatter, to work more feverishly than ever.
+
+They really enjoyed acting the part, too. It seemed to appeal to their
+fondness for a joke. And the best of it was, they always fancied that
+somewhere or other at least one pair of hostile eyes must be observing
+these signs of panic with satisfaction.
+
+Just as darkness began to creep over water and island, clouds shutting
+out the moonlight again, all was pronounced ready. And then the cheery
+"chug" of the motors sounded, for the boys purposely made all the noise
+they could, under the impression that it might seem to add to the
+appearance of a hasty flight.
+
+In this manner did the troop of scouts break camp before they had been on
+Cedar Island more than twenty-four hours; and, so far as appearances
+went, deserted the place of the evil name for good and all.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+UNDER COVER OF DARKNESS
+
+
+Paul had settled it all in his mind as to what their course should
+be. He drew a mental map of the island, and its surroundings; and
+also remembered certain conclusions he had previously entertained
+connected with the depth of water on all sides, between their late
+camp and the mainland.
+
+So the _Comfort_ set the pace, which was not very fast; for they wanted
+darkness to settle fully over the lake, in order that they might move
+around without being seen from the island.
+
+"Tell me when the island is out of sight, Jud," remarked Paul; for some
+of the time the two boats were side by side, and nothing interfered with
+a clear view in the rear.
+
+"Why, it's swallowed up already in the night mist; I can just make out
+that old cedar that stands on top of the little hill," came Jud's reply.
+
+"Good. Then we'll have an easy time slipping back, I reckon," said Paul.
+
+"Going all the way over to the shore; are you?" asked the other.
+
+"Might as well; though we'll have to feel our way. Pretty shallow; ain't
+it, Jud?" for the scout master had set the other to work sounding with
+one of the setting poles, by dropping it over every little while.
+
+"Touch bottom every time but seems to be plenty of water. Guess this
+lake ain't near so deep as that other one up by Rattlesnake Mountain,"
+Jud remarked.
+
+"Oh! it's many times deeper on the other side of the island," observed
+Paul. "I picked out this way across for a good reason."
+
+"I suppose you did," Jud said, with a sublime confidence that was
+refreshing.
+
+"Because, you see," added Paul, "when we start back again, we'll have to
+do without the help of our motors, for, muffle them as we might, they'd
+make enough noise to betray us."
+
+"Oh! I see now," declared Jud, chuckling. "In place of the motor business
+we'll use good hard muscle with these setting poles. And so long as we
+can touch bottom right along, it ain't going to be a very hard job
+getting back to the island. You don't think it's more'n half a mile; do
+you, Paul?"
+
+"Not much more, and we can take our time, Jud. The one thing above all
+others we've got to keep in mind is silence. Nobody ought to knock a
+pole against the side of a boat under penalty of being given black marks.
+And as for talking, it'll have to be in whispers, when at all."
+
+"S-s-sounds g-g-good to m-m-me," said Bluff, who somehow seemed to have
+gone back to his old stuttering ways; though it might be the excitement
+that caused the lapse.
+
+Nothing more was said on the way over, though doubtless the boys kept up
+considerable thinking. They were tremendously worked up over the
+situation. This scheme proposed by the scout leader seemed to appeal to
+the spirit of adventure which nearly every boy who has red blood in his
+veins feels to be a part of his nature.
+
+There was one among them, however, who was silent because of another
+reason; for Old Dan Tucker always declared it a very bad and injurious
+plan to try and converse when one's mouth was crammed full; and crackers,
+too, being apt to get in the wind-pipe, may do all manner of choking
+stunts. So he said never a word.
+
+They presently could see the other shore looming up, though it was
+getting very dark, just as though a storm might be threatening to again
+demoralize them.
+
+"Getting more shoal, Paul," warned the pole heaver.
+
+"How much water have you now?" demanded the leader, ready to give the
+signal for bringing both motorboats to a stop, when it seemed necessary.
+
+"Eight feet, last time; now it's about seven, short," announced Jud.
+
+"Keep on sounding, and when it gets down to three, let me know,"
+ordered Paul.
+
+They were creeping along at a snail's pace now, so even should either
+boat strike mud bottom, which Jud had declared it to be, no particular
+damage would result.
+
+The shore was very close, and still Jud admitted that there was
+plenty of water.
+
+"Keeps up in great shape, Commodore," he remarked, "reckon we could go
+ashore here if we felt that way."
+
+"Which we don't," declared Gusty Bellows, in a low tone.
+
+And not a single voice was raised in favor of such a proceeding; if there
+were any timid souls present, they failed to exhibit their weakness,
+either through fear of boyish ridicule, or some other reason.
+
+Then Paul shut off power, and when he no longer heard the sound of the
+_Comfort's_ exhaust, Jack followed suit.
+
+"We'll hang out here for half an hour, and then head back,"
+explained Paul.
+
+"The outlet isn't far away from here; is it?" Joe Clausin asked.
+
+"Not very far--on the right," Paul replied. "I had that in mind when
+choosing to come this way. You see, if we were intending to only go
+ashore, they'd expect to see a fire burning somewhere. As it is, they'll
+be sure to think we've dropped down into the Radway, preferring to risk
+all sorts of danger from the rocks and snags there, rather than stay here
+another night."
+
+"Makes me think of Napoleon's retreat from Moscow," remarked Nat Smith in
+the other motorboat.
+
+"Oh! come off, will you?" ridiculed Bobolink. "Napoleon was a good one,
+but not in the same class with _us_. He never came back, like we're going
+to do. This retreat is only a fine piece of strategy, remember, while his
+was in deadly earnest."
+
+They talked in low tones that were cousins to whispers, and certainly
+could not be heard half way over to the mysterious island, even
+though water does make the finest conductor of sound possible, as
+every boy knows.
+
+Finally, when about half an hour had gone, Paul said it was time to make
+a fresh start. He had thought it all out, and while taking one pole
+himself, asked the expert, Jud, to handle the other in their boat.
+
+Jack and Tom Betts were to look after those in the _Speedwell_; for the
+scout master knew that Tom could be very careful, given a job that
+required caution.
+
+They took their time, and by degrees Paul led the way across the shallow
+part of the lake. Bobolink had aptly described their movement, when he
+said it reminded him of the words in the song: "He came right in, and
+turned around and walked right out again."
+
+Now it was so dark that most of the scouts found themselves confused as
+to their bearings, the minute they lost sight of the trees along the
+shore. Some wondered how Paul was going to go straight back over their
+recent course, when he did not have even the stars to guide him.
+
+But then, there were many other things he did have, one of which was the
+slight breeze that blew in his face, and which had been directly behind
+them at the time they left the island.
+
+Slowly and laboriously, in comparison with their other trip, the scouts
+crossed the stretch of water. And when finally those who were so eagerly
+watching out for that cedar on the top of the little elevation in the
+middle of the island whispered to Paul that it was dead ahead, they
+realized with wonder that the pilot had led them in a direct line back
+over their course.
+
+Now they altered the line of advance a little. This was in order to
+approach the island about the place where the little bay extended into
+its side, as described by Jack. And Paul allowed the other to take the
+lead, since Jack would be more familiar with the locality than he himself
+might feel.
+
+Noiselessly did the two boats enter that miniature bay, and glide along
+until close to the bank, where the overhanging trees afforded the
+protection they wanted, in order to conceal the craft.
+
+Landing was next in order, and then all their things must again be taken
+ashore, from tents and blankets, to cooking kettles and eatables.
+
+By now the scouts had reduced many of these things to a system. Every boy
+knew just what was expected of him; and presently there was a procession
+of burden bearers carrying things into the brush along a certain trail,
+once in a while perhaps stumbling a little, but keeping strict silence.
+
+They seemed to enjoy it hugely, too. Their nerves tingled while carrying
+out this part of the programme--at least, Bobolink said he had such a
+feeling, and doubtless several more were in the same condition.
+
+Of course there were those who trembled with anticipation of some sudden
+alarm. And then again, others might be beginning to think they would soon
+nearly "cave away" with the empty feeling they had; that was what Old
+Dan Tucker confided in a whisper to Joe Clausin, resting firm in the
+belief that none of the others knew about the pocket full of crackers,
+that he called "life preservers"--which, alas, were all gone now, to the
+last crumb.
+
+Paul led the line and picked out the easiest method of reaching the
+place he had selected for the new camp among the rocks and trees. It was
+in a depression, too, the others noticed, when he told them to drop
+their bundles. That would enable them to have a little fire, since it
+could not be seen as it would be if they were on a level, or an
+elevation. And really, a fire was necessary, if Paul meant they should
+have any supper at all.
+
+"As we brought about all we need, there's no use of making another trip
+to the boats," Paul remarked in a low tone; from which the others judged
+that conversation was not going to be entirely cut out, only they must
+not elevate their voices above a certain pitch, so long as things were as
+quiet as at present.
+
+Now began the task of getting the three tents in position again. And well
+had the scouts learned their lesson in this particular; some of them even
+going so far as to declare that they could do the job with their eyes
+blindfolded, so familiar were they with every part of the operation.
+
+"Like learning type-writin' by touch in school," Bobolink had said.
+
+After all the tents had been raised, and the blankets placed inside, Paul
+gave permission for a small cooking fire to be made.
+
+To some boys a fire is always a fire, no matter what its intended use;
+but the scout who has camped out soon gets to know that there is a vast
+difference between a camp fire, for instance, and one meant only for
+getting meals over.
+
+The former may be composed of great logs and branches that send up a
+cheery and brilliant blaze; but which is next to useless when the cook
+wants to get close in, and attend to his various kettles and frying pans.
+
+Sometimes a hole is scooped out of the ground, and the fire for cooking
+made in that, especially when on level ground, and danger exists of
+hostile eyes discovering the blaze, however small.
+
+As a rule, however, such a fire is made about after this fashion: Two
+logs may be used, if they have flat surfaces, having been more or less
+squared off; but when stones can be procured they are to be preferred.
+Two sides are fashioned out of flat stones, somewhat in the shape of the
+letter V, only not having the line quite so pronounced. Thus a coffeepot
+will rest snugly over the smaller end, while the big frying pan cozily
+covers the larger.
+
+The fire need only be small, but when the cooking commences, there
+should be for the most part red embers in the fireplace, capable of
+sending up great heat, with but a minimum of blaze. And there a cook
+can work in comfort, without dodging back every time a fierce blaze
+darts toward him, threatening to singe his eyebrows, and shorten his
+crop of hair.
+
+Jud knew just how to make such a fire, and as they would need several, in
+order to cook for such a host, some of the other boys busied themselves
+in copying what he did. They had seen him make such a stone fireplace
+before, any way, and some of them had practiced the art in private, being
+desirous of knowing how to do many of the things the leaders were so
+proficient in.
+
+Soon they had more light, when Jud got his fire started; and it was
+then that the boys realized just how fitting that spot was for a hidden
+camp. Their tents could not be seen thirty feet away; and as for the
+small amount of light made by the three cooking fires, little danger of
+it being noticed, unless some one were close by, and actually stumbled
+on the spot.
+
+In fact, the greatest chance they had of being discovered, as Paul well
+knew, did not come from any sense of sight or hearing, but that of smell.
+Should the odors from their supper chance to be carried across the
+island, and in the direction of where these men were staying, they might
+begin to suspect something was wrong, and start an investigation that
+would lead to the discovery of the new camp.
+
+But Paul had also noticed that the night breeze was doing them another
+good service; it had helped him find his way back to the island through
+the darkness resting on the big lake; and now, blowing toward the distant
+shore, the odors of cooking coffee, and frying bass would be taken
+entirely away.
+
+And anyhow, there were eighteen half-starved scouts who had to be fed,
+come what might. So the cooking went on apace, and in due time supper was
+announced as ready. At which more than a few of the waiting lads heaved
+sighs of satisfaction, and Old Dan Tucker, as usual, managed to be the
+first to sit down.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+PITCHING TENTS IN THE "SINK"
+
+
+"This thing is giving us lots of good practice at making camp, and that's
+something," Bobolink remarked while he ate, always taking care to keep
+his voice down to a low pitch, so it would not carry far on the night
+air; though for that matter the wind had increased by now and was making
+quite some noise through the tops of the trees around them.
+
+"I'd like to see anybody put up tents faster and better than we did right
+here," declared Frank Savage; who had by now about recovered from the
+feeling of sickness which came so near keeping him at home, when the
+expedition was formed.
+
+"And as for fires, these couldn't be beat," observed Spider Sexton, as
+he began to catch glimpses of the bottom of his tin platter, after
+making away with some of the food that had been piled high on it by the
+cook of his mess.
+
+"And talk about the grub--it just takes the cake," admitted Old Dan
+Tucker; though no one seemed to pay the least attention to what he
+thought, for they knew him of old, and that the present meal was always
+the "best he had ever eaten, barring none."
+
+Of course it was only natural that while the scouts were enjoying
+their meal in this fashion, many looks betrayed an uneasiness on the
+part of some among their number. Possibly they were wondering whether
+it could be that hostile eyes were fixed upon them then and there, and
+if so, what those strange, unknown men, who seemed to want to rule the
+island, would do when they discovered that the scouts had disobeyed
+their order to leave.
+
+Would they resort to violence? It would not be an easy task to banish a
+dozen and a half lively boys, they were thinking.
+
+Paul had made up his mind with regard to certain things that must be
+done. First of all, they ought to get their heads together, and decide on
+a plan. Should they make any sort of attempt that night to explore the
+island? He owned a splendid little hand electric torch, into which he had
+slipped a fresh battery before starting out on the voyage along the two
+rivers; and this might prove very useful in searching dark and gloomy
+parts of the island. But on the whole, it seemed so foolish to think of
+such a thing, Paul wanted the rest to settle the matter.
+
+So, still cautioning them to speak only in whispers at the most, he
+placed the whole matter before them; much as might the chairman of a
+meeting, after which he asked in so many words:
+
+"You've heard all I know about it; now, what is your pleasure, fellows?"
+
+"So far as I'm concerned," said Bobolink, always the first to speak; "I'm
+willing to do anything the rest say, or go wherever they want to head;
+but to be honest, boys, I'd think we were off our base if we went
+prowling around this queer old island at night time. There are a heap of
+things about it that some people don't want us to know, it seems; and we
+ought to take daylight to spear such facts."
+
+Others were of the same opinion; and when Paul put the vote, it was
+overwhelmingly the sentiment of the meeting that they simply take things
+as easy as they could until dawn came, and then, with fourteen hours of
+light ahead, do all the exploring they liked.
+
+That settled it, since there could be no going behind the returns when a
+majority favored any move. Accordingly, they made preparations for
+passing the night as the conditions best allowed.
+
+"Of course, we must have sentries posted to keep watch?" remarked Jack.
+
+"All through the livelong night. They will have to be changed every
+hour; and four can be on guard at a time. That'll give about two
+turns to every scout, with a chance to get four hours sleep between
+times on duty."
+
+And having said his, Paul, as the acting scout master, proceeded to
+assign each one to his post number. There was no confusion. They had
+practiced this same movement many a time, and now that it was to be
+carried out, the boys profited by their experience.
+
+It could be seen that there was a condition of almost feverish excitement
+under the surface, try as they might to conceal the fact by an appearance
+of coolness. A real peril seemed to be hovering over them, since they had
+chosen to disobey the mandate of the unknown who seemed to claim the
+island as his private property. And if they were discovered during the
+night, there would be no telling what might happen.
+
+At the same time the boys were enjoying the novel experience. It seemed
+to give them a peculiar thrill, not unlike that of a daring skater who
+shoots boldly over thin, new ice, that crackles under him, and bends in a
+dreadful way, but does not break, because his passage has been too swift.
+
+In the morning Paul would pick out several of them, as he thought best;
+and with this exploring party set out to learn what the island contained.
+Meanwhile they would rest quietly in that rocky retreat, in the hope that
+their return had not been noted by any observing eye, and that their
+presence on the island was utterly unknown.
+
+The sentries had been selected, and every boy knew just when his turn to
+take a post would come around. Those who were ready to lie down and get
+some rest were expected to arouse their successors, so that the thing was
+calculated to run along as smoothly as though on a greased track.
+
+If anything out of the ordinary came to pass, and there was time to
+arouse the scout master, Paul wanted it done. He could not remain awake
+himself more than any one of the others, much as he might wish to be on
+the job all the time; but that need not prevent his keeping in touch with
+whatever happened.
+
+Paul still had his shotgun, and had of course made sure to bring it from
+the motorboat when he led his column of burden-bearers trailing through
+the timber and rocks to that little sink in which the new camp had been
+pitched. It had served him often and well, and he was accustomed to
+placing the utmost confidence in the trusty little weapon. But he hoped
+he would find no occasion to use it now, and against human beings. Only
+as the very last resort would he turn to this.
+
+Still, there are times when the presence of an empty gun has done
+wonders; since imagination invests it with all the attributes of a loaded
+weapon. And that was one of the many reasons why Paul kept the
+double-barreled gun close to him, even when he crept into the tent to
+which he was assigned, and lay down on his blanket to try and get a
+little sleep.
+
+Some of the other boys whispered for a while, as they lay with their
+heads close together; but they were too sleepy to keep this up for long;
+so that one by one they dropped off, until from their regular breathing
+it was easy to guess that all had surrendered to the heavy hand of sleep.
+
+Those on guard duty were not supposed to move about very much. They had
+been posted at what might be called the four corners of the camp. Here
+they could, between them, about cover all the space around the sink, for
+their positions were on the more elevated ground.
+
+And as the clouds were breaking at the time Paul crawled under the
+tent, he felt pretty sure that before long they would have the
+assistance of the moon, now more than half full, and which would not
+set until after midnight.
+
+Those who were the first on duty fulfilled their part of the programme
+faithfully. After standing out their "spell," they proceeded to quietly
+awaken those who were scheduled to follow after them. Each fellow knew
+who his successor was, and it had been made a part of his duty to see
+that this scout was not only awakened, but on the job; after which he
+himself could crawl in under his blanket, and take it easy until his
+second turn came, hours later.
+
+Thus Bobolink was one of the second watch. In turn he would have the
+pleasure of arousing the commander, and seeing that Paul took up his
+duty; for in laying out the schedule Paul had not spared himself in
+the least.
+
+Bobolink was an imaginative boy. He could see many things that others
+were apt to pass by without discovering anything out of the ordinary. It
+was a weakness which Bobolink had to guard against; lest he discover
+things that had no foundation in fact.
+
+He sat there, listening and looking, for a long time. The music of the
+breeze in the tree-tops made him a little nervous at first; but presently
+he seemed to get more accustomed to the sounds, and then they made him
+drowsy, so that he had to take himself sharply to task more than once
+because his eyes found it so easy to shut.
+
+Wishing to have something to think about, so as to keep his wits aroused,
+Bobolink began to try and figure out just where his fellow sentinels were
+located and imagine what they were doing. Could they be struggling, as he
+was, to keep awake, one of the hardest things a boy can battle with?
+
+What was that? Surely something moved out yonder among the scrub!
+
+Bobolink sat straight up. He was no longer sleepy. This thing seemed to
+have made his eyes fly wide open; and with his heart pumping at a
+tremendous rate, sending the hot blood bounding through his veins, surely
+he was now in no danger of sleeping on his post.
+
+He watched the spot from which the sound had seemingly come. The moon
+penetrated the bushes only faintly, because it was now nearing the
+western horizon, its journey for the night almost done. Strive as
+Bobolink might to see whether any one was crawling along there, he could
+not for a time make sure.
+
+Then he detected a movement that must mean something. And at the same
+time he discovered what seemed to be twin glowworms in the darkness.
+
+Bobolink had had some little experience in such things, and had read a
+good deal on the subject. He knew that in the night time the eyes of many
+wild animals, particularly of the cat tribe, can appear luminous, so
+that, seen in a certain kind of gloom, they seem to be like yellow
+globes. And that was what these were.
+
+"Huh!" said Bobolink to himself, after he had watched these queer glowing
+balls of fire move several times, that proved in his mind they must be
+the eyes of an animal: "Guess I better give Paul the high sign, and let
+him figure out what it is."
+
+And with that he started to creep into the camp, leaving his post for
+the time being unguarded; for with three other sentries on duty
+Bobolink did not imagine there could be any danger in his withdrawing
+from the line.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+WHAT LAY IN THE BRUSH
+
+
+"Wake up, Paul!"
+
+Bobolink accompanied these whispered words by a gentle shake. He seemed
+to know instinctively just where the scout master was lying; or else it
+must have been, that all this had been systematically laid out
+beforehand; and every fellow had a particular place where he was to curl
+up in his blanket when not on duty.
+
+Paul was awake instantly, even though he had been far gone in sleep at
+the moment that hand touched his arm.
+
+"All right, Bobolink," he said, in a low tone, so as not to arouse any of
+the others. "I'm with you. Time up?"
+
+"Not quite, Paul; but there's some sort of beast creeping around the
+camp; and I thought you ought to know."
+
+Paul sat up at once.
+
+"You did the right thing, Bobolink," he remarked, quietly.
+
+The sentry could hear him groping around, as if for something. Presently
+Paul seemed to have found what he sought. Of course it was his shotgun.
+
+Wildcats were to be found in some of the woods not many miles from
+Stanhope. The scouts knew this, because they had experience with these
+bold pests, who had been attracted by the smell of food in their camp.
+Besides, there were sometimes packs of wild dogs roaming the woods
+that might need to be taught a lesson, in case they gave the campers
+any trouble.
+
+So Paul had been wise to bring that double-barreled gun along. In a
+pinch it would prove a handy thing to have with them. And no doubt it
+gave Bobolink considerable satisfaction to realize that Paul had such a
+weapon handy.
+
+Immediately the sentry started to crawl out of the tent again, with Paul
+close at his heels. A head was raised, and one of the supposed sleepers
+watched the dim figures retreating.
+
+It was Nuthin, who had chanced to be restless, and was awake at the time
+Bobolink came in to arouse the scout master. He had heard all that passed
+between them, and of course felt a thrill at the idea of some ferocious
+wild beast prowling around the tents.
+
+Hardly had the other pair withdrawn before Nuthin started after them. He
+might be a rather timid boy by nature; but when there was anything going
+on Nuthin could not rest content unless he placed himself in a position
+where he could see or hear--perhaps both.
+
+Bobolink led the way back to the post he had been occupying at the time
+he made his discovery. He hoped those luminous eyes would still be
+there, because it might not look just right should he be able to show no
+proof of his story; and boys will take occasion to make all sorts of
+jeering remarks about a fellow falling asleep on his post, and dreaming
+wonderful things.
+
+So it was with considerable anxiety that the sentry crept along to the
+very spot which he remembered he had been occupying at the time.
+
+Considerably to his dismay he could see nothing. There was the patch of
+brush in which he had discovered those gleaming orbs, and from which had
+arisen a low, threatening growl when he first moved off; but look as he
+might Bobolink was unable to detect the first sign of a hostile presence.
+
+He felt disgusted with himself. Luck seemed to be playing him all
+manner of tricks of late, and nothing went right. There was that affair
+of the queer boxes which had been bothering him so long; then the
+mystery of the unknown men who had ordered the scouts to leave the
+island in such a peremptory fashion, without giving the least reason
+for their churlishness. And now, here, even this little matter could
+not work straight.
+
+"It's gone, Paul!" he felt compelled to mutter, after striving several
+times to detect some sign, however faint, of those terrible yellow eyes.
+
+"Just where did you see it, Bobolink?" asked the scout master, knowing
+from his chum's manner how disappointed the sentry must feel that he was
+thus unable to prove his assertion.
+
+"Right in that brush yonder; you c'n see it looks darker than anything
+else," replied Bobolink, eagerly; as if hoping that after all Paul's eyes
+might prove better than his own, and pick up the lost glow.
+
+"Well, it seems to have gone away, then," said the scout master.
+
+"I'm afraid so," grumbled Bobolink, for all the world as though his whole
+reputation for veracity depended on his showing the other that he had not
+been imagining things when he gave his alarm.
+
+"What did you see?" continued Paul.
+
+"Two yellow eyes, and say, weren't they just awful, though? But seems
+like the varmint has side-stepped, and vamoosed. Just my luck, hang it! I
+wanted you to see 'em the worst kind, Paul."
+
+"A pair of shining eyes, eh? When you moved, did you hear anything,
+Bobolink?"
+
+"Sure I did. It growled just like our dog does at home, when he's got a
+bone, and anybody gets too near him," the sentry hastened to explain.
+
+"Made you think of a dog, did it, and not a cat?" asked Paul, quickly.
+
+"Why, yes, I reckon it did," replied Bobolink; "leastways, that's what
+came into my mind. But then a big cat, a regular bobcat, I take it, could
+growl that way, if it felt a notion to."
+
+"You came straight in to wake me up, of course?" continued Paul,
+wishing to figure on the time that might have elapsed since Bobolink
+left his post.
+
+"Crawled right in, and we got back here in a jiffy; but you see it was no
+use when that jinx is on my trail, meanin' to loco everything I do. Now,
+I reckon if it'd been any other feller in the bunch, the critter'd just
+stood its ground, and I'd be vindicated. But me--I'm hoodooed of late,
+and can't do a thing straight."
+
+"Listen!" said Paul, a little sharply, as though he had no sympathy with
+such talk.
+
+They strained their hearing for possibly a full minute. Then Bobolink,
+who liked to talk, could no longer hold in.
+
+"What'd you think you heard, Paul?" he whispered.
+
+"A little rustling sound just alongside the brush you pointed out," the
+scout master replied.
+
+"But you didn't get it again; did you?" urged the other.
+
+"No. But that needn't be proof that something isn't there, and watching
+us, even if we don't glimpse his eyes," replied Paul.
+
+"Oh!" ejaculated Bobolink, with a sudden sense of relief in his voice.
+
+"You heard the rustling then; didn't you?" Paul demanded.
+
+"I sure did, and right over back of the brush it seemed to be. P'raps
+he's givin' the camp the shake, Paul; mebbe he's made up his mind it
+ain't as healthy a place as he thought, after all."
+
+"It couldn't be one of the other sentries moving around, I suppose?"
+ventured Paul, at which his companion gave a low chuckle.
+
+"With those glaring yellow eyes? Well, hardly, Paul. My stars! but if
+you'd only seen 'em, you'd never say that. And besides, the boys were
+ordered not to leave their posts, only to wake up the fellow that
+came after 'em. Oh! put it down for me that isn't any of our bunch
+stirring around."
+
+"Then I must find out what it is!" said Paul, with a ring of
+determination in his voice.
+
+"Wow! d'ye mean to rush the beast, Paul, and try to knock him over with a
+charge of Number Sevens?" demanded Bobolink.
+
+"I've got something better than that to scare him off," replied Paul.
+"You know we don't want to shoot a gun, if we can help it; because the
+report would tell the men that we'd come back, and might bring trouble.
+I've got my little electric hand torch with me, and if I flash that into
+the face of any wild animal the chances are it'll give him a scare
+that'll send him off about his business."
+
+"Oh! I forgot all about that," said Bobolink. "It's just the thing, too.
+How lucky you brought it along, Paul."
+
+Bobolink looked on a good many things as "luck," one way or the other,
+when of a truth they were really planned ahead. The scout master had
+realized that such a useful little contrivance would be apt to come in
+handy on many occasions, when camping out, and had made it a particular
+point to put the torch in his pack before leaving home.
+
+He had it beside him as he slept, but did not consider it wise to press
+the button when awakened, lest the flash arouse the others who were
+sleeping in the same tent.
+
+Bobolink could feel him moving away, and not meaning to be left behind,
+he started after. Bobolink possessed courage, even if he lacked
+discretion. The possibility of an encounter with this doubtless savage
+animal did not deter him from following his leader.
+
+Again they heard that suspicious rustling in the bushes ahead, this time
+louder than before. And quickly on the heels of this sound came a low,
+threatening growl that, strangely enough, made Bobolink chuckle softly,
+he was so pleased over having his announcement proven true to the
+Commodore of the motorboat fleet.
+
+"Look out, Paul," he whispered; "he's laying for you in those bushes.
+Better keep your gun handy, and be ready to give him Hail Columbia!"
+
+Paul did not answer. He had his gun held in such a way that it could be
+fired with a second's warning. At the same time his left hand was
+gripping the little electric torch, with his thumb pressed against the
+trigger that would connect the battery, and send an intense ray of light
+wherever he pointed.
+
+When he heard another rustle, and a growl even more vicious than before,
+he judged about the position of the sounds, and pointing the end of the
+torch straight ahead, pressed the button.
+
+As the vivid flash followed Paul saw something that looked like a
+crouching panther staring at the dazzling glow of his torch--a hairy
+beast that had rather a square head, and a tail that was lashing to and
+fro, just as he had seen that of a domestic cat move with jerks, when a
+hostile dog approached too close to suit her ideas of safety.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+LAYING PLANS
+
+
+"Whee!"
+
+That, of course, was Bobolink giving expression to his feelings when he
+too saw the crouching figure of the ugly beast in the pile of brush.
+
+He fully expected that Paul would now feel it necessary to raise his gun
+to his shoulder, and fire, on the spur of the moment. Contrary to his
+belief, he found that the scout master did nothing of the sort. Instead,
+Paul took a deliberate step forward, straight toward the animal that lay
+there, staring at the blinding light.
+
+"Oh I my stars! he's going to scare him off with only that light!" said
+Bobolink, talking to himself; and yet, strange to say, he followed close
+at the heels of the advancing scout master, clutching his club tightly,
+and doubtless fully determined that if they were attacked, he would make
+the stout weapon give a good account of itself.
+
+For a brief space it seemed an open question whether the animal would
+turn tail and slink away, or openly attack the advancing boys. But there
+was evidently something in that approaching dazzling light, and the
+presence of human beings behind it, that proved too much for the beast.
+He gave a sudden turn, and bounded off, vanishing in the denser scrub
+beyond; and for a short time the listening Bobolink could hear the sound
+of his retreat.
+
+"Whew I that was the stuff, Paul!" cried Bobolink. "He just couldn't look
+you in the eye; could he? That fierce little staring orb was too much for
+him. But what was it, Paul, a panther?"
+
+Some one laughed back of them, and turning, light in hand, Paul
+saw Nuthin.
+
+"What ails you, and how did you get here?" demanded Bobolink.
+
+"Heard what you said to Paul in the tent, and wanted to see what was up,
+so I just crawled out," answered the smaller scout, still grinning, as
+though he had discovered something comical in the adventure.
+
+"Well, what ails you?" Bobolink demanded again, feeling irritated
+somehow.
+
+"Panther! Well, I guess he hasn't got that wild, yet!" ejaculated Nuthin.
+
+Paul began to understand something about it.
+
+"See here, Nuthin," he said, sternly; "you know that was a dog, as well
+as I do; have you ever seen him before? Do you know him?"
+
+Nuthin laughed softly.
+
+"Guess you fellows must have forgot that old mongrel dog, Lion, we used
+to have," he went on. "Well, he disappeared a long time ago, and we never
+knew what did become of him. There always was a sorter wild streak in the
+critter. And now it seems that he's found, it nicer to live like a wolf
+in the woods, than stay at home and be tied to a kennel. Because that was
+Lion, I give you my word for it!"
+
+"Mebbe he smelled you here, and wanted to make up again?"
+suggested Bobolink.
+
+"Don't you believe it," retorted Nuthin. "He never did like me, and my
+dad wouldn't let me go near his kennel. When he skipped out we all felt
+glad of it. And to think he'd show up here, of all places! What d'ye
+reckon he's doin' over here on this island, Paul?"
+
+"Listen. When he got away from you did he have a rope around his neck,
+with six feet of it trailing on the ground?" Paul asked.
+
+"Did he? Not any that I know about. We always kept him fastened with a
+chain; and when he broke away, it was his collar that busted. I've got it
+home yet," was the response.
+
+"Well, that dog had the rope, just as I described. He's been tied up,
+of late, and broke away," the scout master observed, with conviction in
+his voice.
+
+"Then he must have been in the keep of these men who're doin' somethin'
+queer over here on Cedar Island, and don't want a parcel of peepin'
+scouts around; looks that way, don't it, Paul?" Nuthin inquired.
+
+"I was wondering whether it could be that crowd, or the other," Paul
+replied, musingly.
+
+"D'ye mean the wild man?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"It might be," replied Paul. "If your old dog, Nuthin, has taken to the
+free life of the woods--gone back to the type of his ancestors, as I've
+heard of dogs doing many a time--why, you see, he'd just seem to fit in
+with a wild man who lived about like the savages used to away back."
+
+"Wonder if he'll come again to bother us?" queried Bobolink.
+
+"Honestly now, I don't think he will," Paul made answer. "That little
+evil eye of the torch threw a scare into him he won't forget in a hurry.
+I suppose he must have been roaming around, and got a sniff of our
+cooking. That made him feel hungry, and he was creeping in closer and
+closer, in hopes of stealing something, when we broke up his game. And
+now, if it isn't time for me to go on duty, I'll crawl in again, and get
+a few more winks of sleep."
+
+"Say, Paul, don't you think it'd be about right to leave that little
+flashlight with me, in case the dog comes around again?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"I was going to say that very same thing; and when my turn comes you can
+hand it over again. Here you are, Bobolink; and don't go to fooling with
+it, unless you really hear something."
+
+"I won't, Paul," replied the other. "But chances are, I'd better make the
+rounds and tell the other fellers about what happened; because they must
+have seen the flash, and heard us talkin' over here; which will throw 'em
+into a cold fit, wantin' to know all about it."
+
+"A good idea, Bobolink," observed the other, as he and Nuthin moved
+toward the tents again.
+
+The balance of the night passed without any further alarm. If the wild
+dog came prowling around again, attracted by the presence of good things
+to eat, which may have reminded him of other days when he was content to
+remain chained up in the Cypher back yard, and take the leavings from his
+master's table, he certainly did not betray his presence nor could he
+muster up enough courage to crawl into the camp, when it was guarded by
+such a terrible flashing eye.
+
+Morning arrived in good time, and the boys were on the alert. This novel
+experience was having its effect on them all. They showed that their
+sleep could not have been as sound as appearances might indicate, for
+many had red eyes, which were the cause of considerable comment, and not
+a little good-natured chaff on the part of those who betrayed no such
+telltale signs of wakefulness.
+
+Breakfast was prepared about in the same fashion as the supper had been
+on the preceding night. Fires were carefully lighted, and such fuel
+chosen, which, in the opinion of the best judges, would be least apt to
+send up heavy smoke, such as might betray their presence on the island.
+
+All these little things were supposed to be a part of their education as
+scouts and woodsmen. They aroused considerable interest among the boys,
+many of whom had never bothered their heads before to discover that kinds
+of wood burned in various ways; that one might give out only a light
+brown smoke, hard to discern, while another would send up a dense smudge
+that could not fail to attract the eye of any watcher.
+
+Paul showed them that when they wanted to signal with smoke, as all
+scouts are taught to do when learning the wigwag code, they must be
+careful to select only this latter kind of wood, since the other would
+not answer the purpose.
+
+He had been thinking deeply over the matter, and had about made up his
+mind as to what course they should pursue. Like most of his comrades,
+Paul was averse to being driven away from Cedar Island by unknown
+parties, without at least another effort to explore the mysterious
+place, and making an attempt to discover what sort of business these men
+were engaged in.
+
+That it was something unlawful he was convinced, as much as any of his
+chums. Indeed, everything would seem to point that way. Men do not often
+hide themselves in an unfrequented section of the country, unless they
+are engaged in some pursuit that will not stand the light of day.
+
+At one time Paul had even suspected that these men might be some species
+of game poachers, who wishing to defy the law that protected partridges,
+and all feather and fur-bearing creatures in the woods, during the summer
+season, had taken up their dwelling on lonely Cedar Island.
+
+This was in the beginning. On thinking it over, however, he came to the
+conclusion that there was hardly enough game of all kinds within fifty
+miles of Stanhope to pay several men to spend their time snaring it; and
+so on this account he had thrown that theory overboard.
+
+As they ate their breakfast the boys talked of nothing else but the
+mystery of the island, and many were the expressions of opinion that they
+must not think of leaving without doing everything in their power to lift
+the curtain.
+
+They wanted to know who the strange men were who had brought some bulky
+object across from the mainland in a rowboat; what business they were
+engaged in there; who the wild man might be, and last of all whether he
+had any connection with the others.
+
+"You see," declared Bobolink, in his customary impressive way of talking,
+"it looks to me as if they had him here to scare meddlers off. Who wants
+to rub up against a wild man? Everybody would feel like giving the hairy
+old fellow a wide berth, believe me. But Paul, if you make up a bunch to
+explore this bally old island, please let me go along."
+
+There were others just as anxious and then again some gave no expression
+to indicate how they felt about it. So the wise scout master, not wishing
+to have any half-hearted recruits with him on such an errand, observed
+these signs, and made sure to pick only such as had pleaded for
+recognition.
+
+"You can go along, Bobolink," he said, presently; "and I shall need five
+others in addition. Jack, you're one; then there's Bluff, Tom Betts,
+Phil, and Andy. Jud Elderkin will be left in full charge here, and every
+scout is expected to look to him as the chief while I'm gone. Is that all
+understood, fellows?"
+
+Everybody looked satisfied--those who had been selected because they
+wanted to be with the party of exploration and the scouts who would
+remain behind because they had no particular desire to prowl through that
+dense undergrowth, looking for what might prove to be a jack-o'-lantern.
+
+And as they continued to devour the food that had been cooked over the
+little fires they exchanged confidences, all sorts of queer theories and
+plans being suggested. For when eighteen wide awake scouts put their
+heads together, it can be set down as positive that little remains unsaid
+after they have debated any subject pro and con.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+THE EXPLORING PARTY
+
+
+Soon after breakfast was over, Paul began to make his arrangements. Like
+a wise general he wanted to have all the details arranged beforehand, so
+far as he could do so.
+
+"I hope you'll take the gun along, Paul," remarked Bobolink, when those
+who had been selected to accompany the leader were stowing some crackers
+and cheese in sundry pockets, so that they might have a little lunch, in
+case they were delayed longer than seemed probable.
+
+"Yes, because we're more apt to find need for it than those who stay in
+camp," the scout master had replied; which fact seemed to give Bobolink
+considerable satisfaction.
+
+He had not liked the looks of that big fellow which Nuthin claimed to
+have recognized as his old Lion. If they chanced to run across the beast
+again, it might feel disposed to attack them; and nothing would please
+Bobolink more than to have Paul bowl the creature over with a single
+shot. Any dog that did not have the sense to stay at home, and feed at
+the hands of a kind master, deserved to get the limit, he thought.
+
+"It isn't that alone," Bobolink had protested, when Paul took him to
+task for showing such a bloodthirsty spirit; "I've been hearing lately
+that some of the farmers up this way are complainin' about dogs killin'
+their lambs this last spring. And chances are, this same Lion's been one
+of the pack that did the mischief. Once they start in that way, nothin'
+can cure 'em but cold lead. My father said that right out at table. So
+you see, when dogs take to runnin' loose, they're just like boys, an'
+get into bad ways."
+
+Paul thought this was a pretty good argument. He had himself made up his
+mind that should they ever meet that animal again, and he showed a
+disposition to attack any of the scouts, there was only one thing to do.
+
+"How about getting into communication with you while you're gone?" asked
+Jud, who was naturally feeling the new responsibilities of his position
+more or less, and wished to be posted.
+
+"It might be found a good thing," replied the scoutmaster; "and we could
+do it easy enough by flags, if we managed to get to the top of that hill
+where the lone cedar grows. So all the time we're away, Jud, be sure and
+have a scout posted in a tree, where he can watch that cedar, keeping his
+flag handy to answer, if he gets the signal.
+
+"Guess that can be fixed, all right," declared Jud.
+
+"Have him keep his eye out for smoke at the same time," continued Paul.
+"We might want to tell you something, even without getting up to that
+cedar tree. And in case you felt like sending back an answer, you'd
+better have the boys collect a lot of that wood I showed you, that makes
+a black smoke. You know our smoke code, Jud; no danger of our failing to
+make good while you're handling the other end of the line."
+
+That made Jud smile, and feel like doing everything in his power to
+satisfy the scout master. A few drops of oil prevents a vast amount of
+friction. Paul knew there are few boys who do not like to be appreciated;
+and they will do double the amount of work if they feel that they possess
+the full confidence of the one who has been placed in command over them.
+
+When the word was finally given for the little expedition to leave camp,
+and start into the unknown depths of the island, those who were to
+remain behind insisted on shaking hands all around, and wishing them the
+best of luck. Bobolink pretended to make light of it, and to laugh at
+the fellows.
+
+"Great Scott! you'd think we were going away off to Hudson's Bay, not to
+come back again for many moons, if ever!" he scoffed. "Talk about
+Stanley's farewell to Livingstone in the African jungle, why it wasn't
+in the same class as this. Don't you dare try to embrace me, Dan Tucker.
+What d'ye think I am, the pretty new girl that's come to town, and who
+danced with you at our class spread? Hands off, now! And don't any of
+you cry when we're gone. I declare if you aren't turnin' into a lot of
+old women."
+
+So the seven scouts strode away from the hidden camp in the sink,
+plunging into the heavy growth of timber that covered most of the island.
+Once only did they turn, to wave a goodbye to their watching companions,
+who flourished their hats in response, but dared not give the cheer that
+was in their hearts, because Paul had enjoined the strictest silence.
+
+Paul and Jack had more than once tried to figure out what Cedar Island
+must look like; but at the best it was only guess work. None of them had
+ever been here before, and so far they had only roamed over a small
+portion of one end of the island, so that they could not tell even its
+general shape.
+
+That was one of the reasons why Paul wanted to climb the little hill on
+which grew the cedar from which the island must have taken its name.
+Once they gained this point, he fancied they might be able to see all
+parts of the place, and in this manner get a comprehensive idea as what
+it was like.
+
+They kept pretty well together as they pushed through the brush and
+timber. Paul instructed them to watch constantly on all sides, so that
+nothing might escape their scrutiny; and as the little band of scouts
+pushed deeper into the unknown depths of the mysterious island, they felt
+more than ever a sense of the responsibility that rested upon their
+shoulders.
+
+As one of the boys had remarked before, this was good training. They
+could look back to other occasions when they had roamed the woods, once
+in search of a little chap who had been lost; but somehow these incidents
+lacked the flavor of mystery that surrounded them now.
+
+If these men should turn out to be what they already suspected, lawless
+counterfeiters, would they not be apt to show a revengeful spirit if the
+persistent boys interfered with their business to any extent?
+
+Just how far he would be justified in leading his companions on, when
+there was this element of danger in the affair, was a serious question,
+which Paul had as yet not settled in his mind. He was waiting until
+something more definite turned up, and when that occurred he expected to
+be governed by circumstances to a great extent.
+
+Of course they had frequent little shocks. These came when some small
+animals rustled the bushes in fleeing before them, or a bird started out
+of the thick branches of a tree.
+
+The boys were keyed up to such a pitch that their nerves were on edge.
+When a crow, that had been watching their coming with suspicious eye,
+gave a series of harsh caws, and flapping his wings, took flight, Andy
+caught hold of Bluff's sleeve, and gave it a tug.
+
+"Q-q-quit t-t-that!" exclaimed Bluff, in a shrill whisper. "G-g-guess I'm
+k-k-keyed up enough, without m-m-akin' me j-j-jump out of my s-s-skin!"
+
+"Arrah but I thought it was that ould dog a-goin' to lape at us, so I
+did!" muttered the Irish lad, shaking his head, and grasping his cudgel
+more firmly.
+
+All of them had been wise enough to arm themselves in some way before
+starting out. And when seven fairly muscular boys wield that many clubs,
+that have been tried and found true, they ought to be capable of doing
+considerable execution. But in truth there were but six of the cudgels,
+for Paul carried his gun only.
+
+They had by now cleared quite considerable ground, even though their
+progress was in anything but a direct line. On account of dense patches
+of thorn bushes Paul found it necessary to make various detours; but then
+this did not matter to any great extent; for while it added to the length
+of their journey, at the same time it promised to reveal more of the
+island to their search.
+
+One thing surprised Paul. They found the trees so dense that most of
+the time it was possible to obtain only glimpses of the sky above.
+Fortunately the sun continued to shine. He thought it must be pretty
+dingy here on a cloudy day. And the more he saw of Cedar Island the
+less he wondered that some of the ignorant country people believed it
+to be haunted.
+
+Bobolink must have been allowing his mind to run in a similar groove, for
+presently pushing up alongside Paul, he remarked in a whisper:
+
+"Gee! did you ever see a more spooky place than this is, Paul? Now, if a
+fellow _did_ believe in ghosts, which of course I don't, here's where
+he'd expect to run across some of them. Look at that hollow over yonder,
+would you? There goes a woodchuck dodging back into his hole in the bank.
+Ain't it queer how all these animals ever got across from the mainland to
+this island? Why, seemed like all of half a mile to me."
+
+"Wait till we get on top of that hill, and perhaps the thing won't seem
+so queer, after all," replied Paul. "I was thinking the same way; and
+then it struck me that the land might be a whole lot closer to the island
+on the northern side. Why, how do we know but what it's only a narrow
+strait there?"
+
+"I wonder, now," mused Bobolink, who always found much food for thought
+in what information he extracted from the scout master.
+
+They kept on for some five minutes longer, under about the same
+conditions. Paul, however, began to believe that they must by now be
+drawing somewhere near the foot of the little hill that arose near the
+center of the island, as closely as they could figure from their camp at
+the southern end.
+
+The result of their watchfulness was made apparent when Tom Betts
+suddenly declared that he had seen something that looked like a
+blacksmith's forge just beyond a screen of bushes ahead of them.
+
+Cautiously advancing, the seven scouts presently found themselves looking
+upon the exact object Tom had mentioned, which proved that his powers of
+observation were good. It was a forge of some sort, with a bellows
+attached, and a wind screen, but no shelter over the top; which fact
+would seem to indicate that it must be in the nature of a field smithy,
+used for certain purposes to heat or melt metal.
+
+There being no sign of life around, Paul and his six followers swarmed
+out of the brush, and surrounded the forge, which was about as unlikely a
+thing to be run across, away in this forsaken quarter of the country, as
+anything they could imagine.
+
+And as Paul examined the portable forge closer he made an interesting
+discovery.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+A MYSTERY OF THE OPEN GLADE
+
+
+"This has been used since we had that hard rain, fellows," Paul observed.
+
+Some of the others had noticed him handling the ashes that marked where
+the fire had been.
+
+"Say, they are not warm, now, are they?" asked Phil, looking uneasily
+around, as if half expecting to see some rough men come swarming out of
+the bushes.
+
+"Oh! I didn't mean that," replied the scout master. "But you can see
+for yourselves that when it rains there's nothing to keep the water
+from running down over this forge. In that case the ashes would be
+soaked. If you look again you'll see these are perfectly dry, and have
+never been wet."
+
+Several of the scouts picked up some of the ashes, and found that it was
+exactly as Paul stated. They were as dry as powder; and could certainly
+never have been rained upon.
+
+"That means the forge has been used since the storm that helped us get
+through that muddy canal of Jackson's Creek; is that what you mean,
+Paul?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"Nothing else," replied the other, still continuing his investigations,
+as if he hoped to make some further discovery, that might tell them what
+the field forge was intended for, when these unknown men carried it to
+this secluded island.
+
+"Great governor, Paul!"
+
+Bobolink had stooped, and picked something from the ground. This he was
+now holding in his hand, and staring at it, as though he could hardly
+believe his eyes.
+
+The other scouts crowded around him, and their eyes, too, widened when
+they discovered what it was.
+
+"A quarter of a dollar!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+"And a shining new one in the bargain," declared Tom Betts.
+
+"What d'ye think of that, now?" said Phil.
+
+Paul reached over, and took possession of the coin.
+
+"Did you find that, Bobolink?" he asked, for sometimes the other was
+known to play tricks.
+
+"I sure did, Paul, right like this," and stooping over, Bobolink was
+about to pretend to pick up something when he uttered a gasp.
+
+"Another one!"
+
+He was holding a second coin in his hand, the exact duplicate, so far as
+they could see, of the first one.
+
+"Must grow here in flocks!" exclaimed Phil; "let's see if we can dig up a
+whole bunch of 'em, boys!" But although they all started digging with the
+toes of their shoes, no more shining coins came to light; and it began to
+look as if Bobolink had been fortunate enough to pick up all there were.
+
+Paul closely examined the two bright quarters.
+
+"If those are queer ones then they'd fool me all right, let me tell you!"
+declared Bobolink.
+
+"I never saw better in my life," Paul admitted.
+
+The boys were looking pretty serious by now. It began to seem as though
+that guess made by one of their number could not have been so wide of the
+mark as at the time some of them believed. Here was pretty strong
+evidence that these men were engaged in manufacturing spurious coins.
+
+Ought they to consider they had gone far enough, and give up the
+exploration of the island, returning home to sound the alarm, and
+send word to the authorities, so that these men might be trapped as
+they worked?
+
+Paul was tempted to consider that his duty lay that way. Still, there
+were some things that puzzled him, and made him hesitate before
+concluding to follow that idea.
+
+Why should they keep the forge out here in the open, when some shelter
+would seem to be the proper thing, if, as the scouts now believed, they
+were using the fire to smelt metals, and blend them to the proper
+consistency for the bad coins?
+
+That was something that puzzled Paul greatly. It caused him to look
+around in the neighborhood of the forge, in the hope that he might pick
+up some other clue.
+
+The ground was pretty well trampled over, as though a number of men had
+been walking back and forth many times in their occupation, whatever it
+could have been. Paul also saw a number of indentations in the earth,
+which made him think some heavy object had rested in that open space.
+
+"Whatever they brought here," remarked Jack, presently, "it looks like
+they must have used some sort of vehicle to carry it; because these
+tracks have the appearance of ruts made by wheels."
+
+"Rubber tires, too," added Phil. "I've seen too many of 'em not to know;
+for my father has a garage."
+
+"Is that so?" exclaimed Bobolink, shaking his head, as if to say that
+with each discovery the mystery, instead of getting lighter, only grew
+more dense.
+
+"And look how close together they seem to be, would you; a pretty narrow
+bed for a wagon, don't it seem?" asked Tom Betts.
+
+"But they run off that way," observed Bobolink, "and there are so many of
+the tracks you can hardly tell which are mates. There's Paul followin'
+'em up; reckon we'd better keep with him, boys. We don't want to get
+separated."
+
+Paul soon came to a stop, and was joined by the others.
+
+"Queer how the marks all seem to knock off about here," he remarked,
+pointing to the ground. "You can't find one further on. And it isn't that
+the ground suddenly gets hard, either. This looks the queerest thing of
+them all. What do they run that thing with wheels up and down here for?
+Anybody know?"
+
+But silence was the only answer he received, since every one of the six
+other scouts seemed to be scratching his head, and wrinkling his
+forehead, as though deep in thought, yet unable to see light.
+
+So they went back to the field forge, to look around again, though their
+labor was all they had for their pains.
+
+"Not even another lovely quarter to be picked up where it got spilled
+when they made 'em here, p'raps by the bushel," grumbled Bobolink,
+scratching the earth with his toe in vain.
+
+He had recovered the coins from Paul, and jingled them in his pocket;
+though the envious Bluff warned him that they might get him into a peck
+of trouble, should he be caught by Secret Service men.
+
+"Huh! guess you think you c'n scare me into droppin' them," declared
+Bobolink, thrusting out his chin at Bluff. "Let me know if you see me
+doin' it; will you? I c'n just see you falling all over yourself, tryin'
+to grab these dandy coins, if I let 'em slip by me. Shoot a ball up
+another alley, Bluff. Go hunt a fortune for yourself, and don't want to
+grab mine. Hands off, see?"
+
+"Do we go back now, Paul; or had we better keep on to the hill?" Jack
+asked, as though he knew the other must have been settling this important
+matter in his mind.
+
+"I think as we've come this far, with the hill just ahead of us, it would
+be a disappointment not to get up to that cedar tree," Paul replied; at
+which every one of the other scouts nodded his head.
+
+"W-w-want to s-s-see what the old p-p-place l-l-looks like," remarked
+Bluff, in his positive way.
+
+"And there's no use in our staying around here any longer, either, I
+should think," ventured Phil. "How do we know but what some of the men
+may just happen to butt in on us, while we're looking their old forge
+over? And if they did, I just guess they'd make things hum for us. So I
+say, into the woods again for me--the sooner the better."
+
+"I hope we're doing the right thing by keeping on," Paul observed,
+looking at his companions in a way they took as an invitation to
+back him up.
+
+"Who's got a better right to go where we feel like?" demanded Bobolink.
+
+"Honest men wouldn't have any kick coming, just because a troop of Boy
+Scouts happened to camp on their island; and it only goes to show
+they're doing something shady, that's what. I say go on," Phil gave as
+his opinion.
+
+Jack, Andy, Bluff and Tom were quick to declare themselves opposed to any
+change of plan, at least, until after they had reached their goal, which
+was the foot of the cedar on top of the hill.
+
+This decision seemed to give Paul more heart, and when they left the open
+space he cast a last glance back at it, as though still puzzled.
+
+The trees grew even more dense as they drew nearer the foot of that
+peculiar rise in the ground which went to make up what they called a
+hill. Indeed, the boys were astonished to find such an almost
+impenetrable jungle.
+
+"Isn't that some sort of shack you can see over yonder?" asked Phil,
+presently.
+
+As the rest looked, they agreed that it looked like a rude shelter, made
+out of branches, and some boards fastened together in a crude way.
+
+There was no sign of life about the place, and after making sure of this
+the scouts grew bold enough to advance upon it from what seemed to be the
+rear, though this could be settled only by the fact that the entrance to
+the rustic hut appeared to be on the other side.
+
+Creeping noiselessly up until they were alongside the shelter, the scouts
+set about finding loopholes through which they might obtain a glimpse of
+what lay on the other side of those frail walls.
+
+Then one by one they drew back, and the looks they cast at each other
+indicated that what they had seen was not a pleasant sight.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+THE WIGWAG MESSAGE
+
+
+The other side of the rough shack was partly open, so that
+considerable light managed to gain admittance. This had enabled the
+scouts to see a figure lying on some old blankets, together with the
+skins of several animals.
+
+It was without doubt the wild man who had given some of their troop such
+a bad scare when he turned up near the camp soon after their arrival on
+the island.
+
+He seemed to be sound asleep, and none of them were at all anxious to
+make any sound calculated to arouse him. Indeed, more than one put a
+finger to his lips to indicate that they were sealed, as he turned and
+looked anxiously at his comrades.
+
+Paul made motions to let them know it would be just as well if they quit
+the vicinity of that queer shack, where the crazy man, as they now deemed
+him, had his home.
+
+A few minutes later, when they had put enough distance between themselves
+and the rude shelter to permit conversation, Bobolink could no longer
+keep his opinions to himself.
+
+"He was a jim-dandy, all right, and a genuine wild man of the woods!" he
+remarked. "What are the circus fellows thinkin' of, to let such a fine
+chance slip by to get a real 'What-is-it,' fresh from the jungles of
+Borneo, half man, and the rest gorilla?"
+
+"And he had Nuthin's dog, after all," observed Paul, quietly.
+
+"What makes you say that, Paul?" asked Jack.
+
+"Because, in the first place, I saw a lot of bones, picked as clean as a
+whistle, lying on the ground over in a corner. Then there was a lair that
+looked as if an animal slept in it. And if that wasn't enough, I noticed
+a piece of broken rope fastened to a stake, close by that corner. You
+remember I said the dog was dragging a piece of rope around with him,
+when he came creeping up near our camp last night? He broke away, all
+right; and I guess the wild man will be minus his dog after this."
+
+"Well, that's one thing settled," asserted Phil "We know now, for sure,
+there _is_ a wild man up here; and some of the officers will have to come
+and capture him. My father is one of the county freeholders, and he's
+overseer of the poor in the bargain; so I suppose it'll be up to him to
+carry out the job. They can't afford to have people say there's a crazy
+wild man at large, in our district, you see."
+
+"Did any of you notice that there was a rude sort of table in the shack?"
+asked Paul, as they kept on moving forward, wondering if a third
+discovery might be made at any minute.
+
+"Well, now, that's a fact," replied Bobolink. "I did see that, but
+somehow didn't think it queer at the time, not enough to mention it,
+anyhow. But come to think of it, it was kind of out of the way in the
+shack of a wild man, eh?"
+
+"There was something on the table that would seem stranger, if you'd
+noticed it. I saw a battered old coffeepot there!" observed Paul,
+smiling grimly.
+
+"What?" ejaculated Bobolink. "A wild man liking coffee! Where d'ye
+suppose he gets the roasted bean? It don't grow on the bushes up here;
+and he sure don't look as if he had the cash to buy it. Oh! p'raps they
+use him to pass some of this bogus coin they make! Mebbe he goes to
+towns, and buys their supplies, all the time they're workin' like beavers
+up here, makin' the stuff."
+
+"I don't just agree with you there, Bobolink," said Paul. "In the first
+place, as Phil will tell you, if such a scarecrow ever came into
+Stanhope, or any other town in the country, the officers would be sure
+to arrest him, and examine him to see if he oughtn't to be shut up in the
+asylum. If he got the old pot and the coffee to go with it from these
+men, then it was in the nature of a bribe not to interfere with their
+business, as they wanted to stay here on his Island."
+
+"Great brain, Paul; you seem to hit the right idea every time. And
+chances are, that's just what happened," Bobolink remarked.
+
+"That dog didn't come back," observed Tom Betts.
+
+"And therefore he's still loose," added Phil, uneasily. "Hope we don't
+run across the beggar again; but if we should, remember Paul, the country
+expects you to do your duty. You must bag him, no matter what noise you
+have to make doing it"
+
+"Leave that to me," remarked the scout master. "Now that we know pretty
+well how the land lies, and whose dog it is, perhaps I won't be so
+squeamish about shooting the beast if the chance comes along."
+
+"Here's the foot of the rise," Jack broke in.
+
+"And the trees grow more thin as the ground ascends, you notice," Paul
+went on. He called their attention to all such things, because he was
+acting as scout master of the troop, and it seemed to him that he should
+not allow any chance to pass whereby he might enlarge the horizon of
+scout lore of the lads under him.
+
+"Then it strikes me that we ought to be a bit careful not to show
+ourselves too plain, as we go up," Jack suggested.
+
+"You're right," added Bobolink. "For all we know, these fellows may
+have a lookout in a tree, as well as we have, and he'd see us if we got
+careless. That means we must dodge along, taking advantage of every
+sort of shelter that crops up. Great fun, boys, and for one I'm just
+tickled to death over the chance to prove that we learned our little
+lesson O. K."
+
+All were presently stooping at one moment, where the bushes grew sparse;
+crawling in among some sheltering rocks at another, and even getting down
+to wriggle along like so many snakes, when not even so much as a bush
+offered a means of hiding from observation, in case hostile eyes happened
+to be turned upwards toward the hilltop at the foot of the lone cedar.
+
+It was not a great distance to cover, and before long they found
+themselves close to their goal.
+
+Already could they see over the southern side of the island; and after
+they gained the cedar it would probably be easy to also survey the
+northern half, the part which doubtless held more of interest to them
+than any other, since they had reason to believe that the mysterious
+dwellers on the isle were somewhere there.
+
+"Five more minutes will do it," remarked Paul, when they had gathered in
+a shallow depression which afforded shelter until they caught their
+breath again for another climb.
+
+Paul was looking hard at something far beyond the lake. Bobolink, of
+course, being attracted by his scrutiny, also allowed his gaze to wander
+in that quarter; but all he saw was what he took to be a buzzard, almost
+out of sight--a dim speck in the heavens, and about to pass out of sight
+altogether where clouds hovered above the southern horizon.
+
+"I c'n see about where our camp is," Phil was saying, "and I think I know
+which tree the signal corps is stationed in. Anyhow, I seem to glimpse
+something white moving among the green leaves, which, I take it, is a
+flag being held ready to wave at us."
+
+"I reckon Paul will soon let 'em know we're still on the map," observed
+Bobolink. "But won't they be s'prised when they learn that we saw the
+terrible wild man in his own den; and ran across the plant where those
+rascals make their bogus coin, that looks as bright and good as any Uncle
+Sam stamps out?"
+
+Just then the leader gave the signal for another advance, and the six
+scouts who followed set about completing the last leg of the climb.
+
+They finally found themselves at the roots of the cedar tree that crowned
+the elevation, and which proved of a size far beyond what any of the
+scouts had imagined.
+
+"Well, here we are at last," said Phil, breathing hard after his
+exertions.
+
+"And," added Bobolink, also badly winded, though he would chatter; "now
+to see Paul get one of the other fellows on the line, to wig his wag at
+us, or do something that sounds that way. There he goes at it. And looky
+there, they've been watching us climb, I reckon, because almost before
+Paul made the first sign, that other fellow began sendin'."
+
+They watched the fluttering red flag with the white centre. Some of them
+had taken more or less interest in sending and receiving messages; but
+the boy in the tree proved too fast for any of them to follow. They
+suspected that it was Jud Elderkin himself; for outside of Paul and Jack,
+he was the best hand at that sort of thing.
+
+"My stars! he keeps right along doing it; don't he?" muttered Bobolink.
+
+"Must be some message, too, believe me," added Phil.
+
+"N-n-now, what d'ye s-s-suppose has happened at c-c-camp since we
+q-q-quit?" remarked Bluff, anxiously waiting for the message to be
+translated.
+
+Not once did Paul break in on the sending of the message. He sat there,
+close to the base of the big cedar which sheltered his back from the
+north side of the island; and seemed to be wholly engrossed in
+transcribing the various signs of the flag code.
+
+They could not see the boy in the branches of the tree; but from their
+elevated position the white and red flag was in plain view. Up and down,
+and crosswise, it continued to write its message, that was doubtless like
+printed letters to Paul and Jack, while unintelligible to those who had
+never taken lessons in wigwagging.
+
+Finally came the well known sign that the message was done; and that the
+sender awaited the wishes of the party with whom he was in communication.
+
+Paul turned upon his comrades. They saw that the frown had come back
+again to his usually smooth forehead, as though he had learned
+something to add to the perplexities of the problem they were trying so
+diligently to solve.
+
+"It's Jud," he said, simply, "and he's just sent an astonishing
+message. This is the way it ran, boys: 'Presence here known. Man in
+aeroplane passed over camp. Went down lake half hour ago. Out of sight
+now. Answer!'"
+
+No wonder Bobolink fairly held his breath, and the other five scouts
+looked at each other, as though they could hardly believe their ears. For
+a full minute they sat there and stared; while Bobolink remembered the
+far-away black object that, at the time, he had thought to be a buzzard.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+STILL FLOUNDERING IN THE MIRE
+
+
+"Whee!"
+
+It was, of course, Bobolink who gave utterance to this characteristic
+exclamation.
+
+Like most of the others, he had been so stunned by the message
+read by Paul, that for the moment he failed to find words to
+express his feelings.
+
+An aeroplane had passed over the camp! And heading south, which would
+take it toward the quarter where Stanhope lay!
+
+Here they had thought themselves so far removed from civilization that
+the only persons within a range of miles might be set down as a wild man
+and some lawless counterfeiters, who had chosen this region because of
+its inaccessibility.
+
+And now they had learned that one of the latest inventions of the day had
+been moving above the island, with the pilot actually looking down on the
+camp, and so discovering the fact of the Boy Scouts having returned after
+their banishment from the place.
+
+No wonder they all stared at each other, and that speech was denied them
+for a time.
+
+Jack was the first to speak. He had read the message, being nearly as
+good a signalman as Paul or Jud.
+
+"Things seem to be picking up at a pretty lively clip for us; eh,
+fellows?" was the way he put it.
+
+"Picking up?" gasped Bobolink; "Seems to me they're getting to the red
+hot stage about as fast as they can. An aeroplane! And up here on our
+desert island at that, which folks said was given over to spooks and
+wild men! That _is_ the limit, sure! Hold me, somebody; I think I'm
+going to faint!"
+
+But as nobody made any movement in that direction, Bobolink
+changed his mind.
+
+"Let's look into this thing a little closer, fellows," said Paul, always
+prompt to set an investigation going.
+
+"That's what!" echoed Bluff, surprising himself by not stammering a
+particle, even though he was still quivering with excitement.
+
+"Jud says an aeroplane passed over the camp; but he didn't tell whether
+it rose from the island or not, though the chances are that it did," Paul
+continued.
+
+"Why do you say that as if you felt sure?" demanded Tom Betts.
+
+"Yes," put in Phil, eagerly, "you've got on to something, Paul; give us
+a chance to grab it, too, please."
+
+"Sure I will," complied the scout master, cheerfully. "And I'm only
+surprised that one of you, always so quick to see such things, hasn't
+jumped on to this little game as soon as I have. Look back a short time,
+and you'll remember how we were scratching our heads over the tracks of
+wheels down in that big opening!"
+
+"Wheels!" exclaimed Bobolink, with fresh excitement. "Well, I should say
+yes; and looks to me like we had 'em in our heads too, where the brains
+ought to be. Wheels, yes, and rubber-tired wheels too! Remember how they
+seemed to run up and down a regular track, and just went so far, when
+they gave out? Whoop! why, it's as easy as two and two make four. Anybody
+ought to have guessed that."
+
+"Huh!" remarked Tom Betts, scornfully; "that's what they said, you
+recollect, when Columbus discovered America. After you know, everything
+looks easy. In my mind Paul goes up head. He's in a class by himself."
+
+"And that forge might have been used, among other things, for doing all
+sorts of mending metal pieces connected with an aeroplane," Paul went on,
+smiling at Tom's tribute of praise.
+
+"Not forgetting these sort of things," Bobolink observed, positively,
+as he took out a pair of bright new quarters, and jingled them
+musically in his hand.
+
+"Well, we haven't had any reason to change our minds about that
+thing,--yet," said Paul. "But what strikes me as the queerest of all is
+the fact that while we must have been pretty close by when that aeroplane
+went up, how was it none of us heard the throbbing of the engine?"
+
+They looked at each other in bewilderment. Paul's query had opened up a
+vast field of conjecture. One and all shook their heads.
+
+"I pass," declared Tom.
+
+"Me too," added Phil.
+
+"Must 'a got some new kind of motor aboard that is silent,"
+suggested Jack.
+
+"J-j-just a-goin' to s-s-say that, when Jack t-t-took the w-w-words out
+of m-m-my m-m-mouth," Bluff exploded.
+
+"No trouble doin' that, Bluff," laughed Bobolink. "If that aeroplane did
+climb up out of that field, while we pushed through the heavy timber, and
+none of us heard a thing, let me tell you, boys, they've got a
+cracker-jack of a motor, that's what!"
+
+"But arrah! would ye be thinkin' that a lot of bog-trottin'
+counterfeiters'd be havin' a rale aeroplane?" burst out Andy Flinn, who
+had up to now been unable to give any expression to his feelings.
+
+"I'd say these fellers must be a pretty tony lot, that's all,"
+Bobolink declared.
+
+"Whatever do you suppose they use such a machine for?" asked Tom.
+
+Again all eyes were turned upon Paul, as the oracle of the group of
+wondering scouts. He shrugged his shoulders, as if he thought he had as
+much right as any of the others to admit that he was puzzled.
+
+"Well, we'd have to make a stab at guessing that," he observed. "Any one
+thing of half a dozen might be the truth. An aeroplane could be used for
+carrying the stuff they make up here to a distant market. Then again, it
+might be only a sort of plaything, or hobby, of the chief money-maker;
+something he amuses himself with, to take his mind off business. All men
+have hobbies--fishing, hunting, horse racing, golf--why couldn't this
+chap take to flying for his fun?"
+
+"That sounds good to me," declared Bobolink; "anyhow, we know he must be
+a kind of high-flier."
+
+"Seems like our mystery bulges bigger than ever," remarked Phil,
+frowning.
+
+"It does, for a fact," admitted Tom; "instead of finding out things,
+we're getting deeper in the mud all the time."
+
+"Oh! I don't know," Paul said, musingly; and although the rest instantly
+turned upon him, fully expecting that the scout master would have some
+sort of communication to make, he did not think it worth while, at that
+time, to explain what he meant.
+
+"Say, I wonder, now, if we could see anything of those fellows from up
+here?" remarked Bobolink, suddenly.
+
+"That's so," echoed Phil, perceiving what the other intended to convey;
+"we can see the whole of the island now; and if they're camped somewhere
+on the north end, perhaps we might get a glimpse of canvas."
+
+"What makes you think these men have their headquarters on the north end,
+rather than anywhere else?" asked Paul, quickly.
+
+"Why, when we got up here, I noticed that smoke was climbing up over
+there; and smoke means a fire; which also tells that some person must be
+around to look after it," replied Phil, promptly.
+
+"Pretty good reasoning," said Paul, nodding his head toward Phil; for if
+anything gave him pleasure as scout master of the troop, it was to see a
+boy using his head.
+
+All now looked over the crown of the hill, toward the upper end of the
+island. The first thing they saw, of course, was the thin column of
+smoke which Phil had mentioned. Then Bobolink burst out with:
+
+"And you were right, Paul, when you said that the chances were the island
+was close to the north side of the lake, so animals could swim across.
+Why, only a narrow streak of water separates 'em there, sure enough."
+
+"Oh! that was only a guess on my part," Paul confessed. "I saw about how
+far away the mainland trended up there, and supposed that our island must
+run near it in places. I'm pleased to see that I hit the mark, for once
+at least, in this mixed-up mess."
+
+Paul was evidently more or less provoked because he had been unable to
+understand many of the strange things that had happened since their
+arrival on Cedar Island. And the others knew that he was taking himself
+to task because of his dullness; but what of them, if the scout master
+needed to be wakened up--where did they come in?
+
+"I can't be sure about it," observed Phil, who had been looking intently
+at one particular spot; "but it seems as if I could make out the roof of
+a shed of some kind, over yonder, close to where the smoke rises."
+
+This set them all to looking again. Andy, who had very good eyes,
+declared he could make it out, and that it was a roof of some kind; one
+or two of the others, after their attention had been called to the spot,
+also admitted that it did look a little that way, though they could not
+say for a certainty.
+
+"Anyhow, I reckon that's where these men live," Paul declared; "and now
+the question is, are we going to turn back here; or keep right on
+exploring this queer old Cedar Island?"
+
+Bobolink, who was busy cutting his initials in the bark of the big cedar
+that topped the squatty hill, spoke first of all; for being an impetuous
+fellow, he seldom thought twice before airing his opinions.
+
+"Me to push right on," he said. "What difference does it make to us that
+some other fellows chance to be camping on the same island? It's free to
+all. We aren't going to bother them one whit, if only they leave us
+alone. But they began wrong, you see, when they told us to get off the
+earth. That riled me. I never did like to be sat on by anybody. It just
+seems like something inside gets to workin' overtime, and all my badness
+begins to rise up, like mom's yeast in a batch of dough. Count my vote to
+go on ahead, Paul."
+
+"Well, who's next?" asked the scout master "and remember, that when
+it comes to a matter like this, I always try and do what the
+majority wants."
+
+"I'm willing to do what the rest say," came from Jack.
+
+"Go right on, and make a clean job of it," said Tom Betts, grimly.
+
+"S-s-same here!" jerked out Bluff.
+
+"That spakes my mind to a dot, so it do," Andy followed.
+
+Paul threw up his hand.
+
+"Enough said; that makes four in favor already, and settles the matter. I
+won't tell you which way I would have voted, because the thing's been
+taken from my hands. And besides, I would only have considered your
+welfare in making my decision, and not my own desire."
+
+"Which manes he would have said yis for himsilf, and no for the rist of
+us," declared the Irish boy, exultantly; "so it's glad I am we've made up
+our minds to go on. Whin do we shtart, Paul, darlint?"
+
+"Right away," replied the one addressed. "There's no use staying any
+longer up here, unless you think I'd better get Jud again, and wigwag him
+all that we've learned up to now."
+
+"It'll keep," said Phil, hastily, for he wanted to see the faces of those
+other scouts when the several astonishing pieces of news were told;
+especially about the finding of the real wild man asleep, the discovery
+of the field forge in the open glade and the picking up of the two silver
+quarters, which last he felt sure would give them all a surprise.
+
+"A11 right!" the scout master announced, "I think pretty much the same
+way; and besides, it would take a long while sending all that news.
+But perhaps I ought to let the boys know we're going on further; and
+that they needn't expect us much before the middle of the afternoon.
+That'll give us plenty of time to roam around, and perhaps come back
+another way."
+
+So he started once more to catch the attention of Jud, perched high up in
+that tree above the sink near the lower end of the island, where he could
+have an uninterrupted view of the cedar on the top of the hill.
+
+Then there was a fluttering of the signal flag and briefly the scout
+master informed the other as to what their intentions were.
+
+"That job's done," Paul remarked, presently, when Jud replied with a
+gesture that implied his understanding the message; "and now to move
+down-hill again. We're taking some big chances in what we're expecting to
+do, fellows, and I only hope it won't prove a mistake. Come along!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+THE DISCOVERY
+
+
+"There's one thing that I think we haven't bothered our heads much about,
+Paul," remarked Jack, just before they quitted the vicinity of the big
+cedar on top of the hill.
+
+"What?" asked Bobolink, cocking his head on one side to see how well his
+initials looked in the bark of the tree from which Cedar Island took its
+name; and which would tell later explorers that others had been there
+ahead of them.
+
+"Why, it seems to me those clouds down there on the southern horizon have
+a look that spells storm," Jack continued.
+
+"Wow! wonder if we will strike another rainy spell?" said Bobolink, so
+quickly that none of the others had a chance to get a word in; "that last
+one helped us get out of the mud in the canal; if another comes will it
+be as accommodatin', or turn on us, and whoop things up, carrying our
+tents away over the island, and losing 'em in the swamps beyond there?"
+
+"Oh! say, don't imagine so much, Bobolink," interrupted Phil. "You're
+the greatest fellow I ever saw for figuring all sorts of bad things out
+long before they ever get a chance to start. What Jack means is, will we
+be apt to get caught in the rain, and be soaked?"
+
+"That's the main thing," added Tom Betts, who was rather particular about
+how his khaki suit looked on him, for Tom was a bit of a "dresser," as
+some of the others, less careful with regard to their looks, called it.
+
+"I've noticed that it's grown pretty close and muggy," Paul went on.
+
+"I should say it had," added Bobolink. "I kept moppin' my face most of
+the way up the rise. Thought we'd sure get a fine breeze after reachin'
+the top; but nixey, nothing doing. It's as dead as a door nail; or Julius
+Caesar ever was. Yes, that spells rain before night, I'd like to risk my
+reputation as a weather prophet in saying."
+
+"Still, we go on?" Paul asked.
+
+"Well, we'd be a fine lot of scouts," blurted out Bobolink, "if the
+chance of getting our backs wet made us give up a plan we'd decided on."
+
+"Lead the way, Paul; they're bent on finding out something more about
+these men. And feeling that way, as Bobolink says, a little rain storm
+wouldn't make them change their minds," and Jack, while speaking, started
+after the scout master, who had commenced to descend the hill.
+
+They did not immediately turn toward the north side. There seemed no use
+in deliberately making their presence known to any one stationed over at
+the north end of the island, providing the mysterious men were not
+already aware of it.
+
+Paul, when doing his wigwag act, had been careful to keep the crest of
+the hill between his flag and that suspicious quarter where the smoke
+column was lazily creeping up, as smoke has a habit of doing just before
+rain comes.
+
+Of course it might be possible that the man in the aeroplane, after
+discovering the tents in the sink, may have made some sort of signal
+that would tell his comrades the fact of the scouts having returned in
+the night.
+
+Paul wished, now that it was too late, he had thought to ask Jud about
+that point. It might be of some benefit to them to know whether the men
+were aware of their presence; or rested serene in the belief that they
+were the only occupants of the island, besides the wild man.
+
+After the scouts had gone down a little way, Paul began to change his
+course. He was now turning toward the north. The trees grew much more
+thickly here, and would surely screen them from observation.
+
+The boys had resumed their former habit of observing everything that came
+in their way, as true scouts always should. They turned their heads from
+right to left and Bobolink even looked back of him more than a few times.
+Perhaps he remembered that there was a wild man at large who might take a
+notion to awake from his sleep, and, discovering the scout patrol, think
+it his business to follow them.
+
+And then, to be sure, they ought to keep in mind the fact concerning that
+wild dog that had gone back to the habits of its ancestors, preferring to
+live by hunting, rather than take food from the hand of man. It would be
+far from pleasant to have old Lion suddenly sneak up on them, and give
+them a scare.
+
+But everything seemed peaceful around them. Now and then a bird would fly
+out of a thicket, or give a little burst of song from the branch of some
+tree. A red-headed woodpecker tapped boisterously on the dead top of a
+beech near by, trying hard to arouse the curiosity of the worms that
+lived there, so as to cause them to poke out their heads to see who was
+so noisy at their front doors; when of course the feathered hammerer
+stood ready to gobble them up.
+
+"Oh!" gasped Bobolink, when there was a sudden whirring sound of wings,
+and they had a furtive glimpse of something flashing through the
+undergrowth near by.
+
+"It's only a partridge; don't be worried!" remarked Phil.
+
+"Sure it was," muttered Bobolink, with scorn; "any fellow with only one
+eye'd know that _now_; but all the same, the thing gave me a bad turn,
+I'm that keyed up."
+
+"And that's a cotton-tail looking at us over yonder, so don't throw
+another fit when he takes a notion to skip out," Phil continued, pointing
+with his cudgel to where a rabbit sat, observing the intruders, as though
+wondering what business any human beings had coming to the island that
+had been left alone so long.
+
+Presently the little animal skipped off a few paces and then stopped
+again. As the scouts advanced, it repeated these tactics; indeed, so
+tame did it seem that any of them could have easily hit the rabbit with
+a stone, had they felt so inclined, which, as scouts, they could not
+think of doing.
+
+"Looks like she's got a litter of young ones close by here," said
+Bobolink; "and is playing lame just to lead us away from the bunch. I've
+seen rabbits do that before now. The cuteness of the thing! Look at her,
+would you, just beggin' us to run after, and try to capture her?"
+
+"I've seen a partridge act as if she had a broken wing," Jack remarked,
+quietly; "and flutter along the ground in a way that couldn't help but
+make one try to catch her; but if you chased after her, it would be to
+see the old bird take wing pretty soon, and go off like a rocket."
+
+"Same here," declared Paul; "and going back, I flushed a whole covey of
+the prettiest little birds you ever saw. They'd been crouching under a
+bush while the old one played lame; just as if she'd told them all about
+it. But I heard her calling in the brush later on, and of course she got
+them all together again."
+
+"There goes your lame rabbit now, Bobolink; and say, look at the way she
+jumps over the ground," remarked Phil, chuckling.
+
+"Not so loud, boys," cautioned the scout master. "These things are all
+mighty interesting; but we mustn't forget what we're here for nor yet the
+fact that we've got a pretty good hunch there are some men close by who
+would be just as mad as hops if they knew we meant to stalk their camp
+and spy on them. If you have to say anything, whisper it softly,
+remember."
+
+At that they all fell silent. It was true that they had forgotten for the
+moment that they were doing scouting work; and under such conditions
+talking was not allowed, especially above the lowest tone.
+
+All of them noticed that it was getting very close now, for they had to
+use the red bandanna handkerchiefs they carried, and quite frequently at
+that, to wipe away the perspiration that oozed from their foreheads.
+
+"Lucky we left our coats in camp; isn't it?" remarked Phil.
+
+"Looks that way now, but if that rain does strike us, we may wish we had
+'em on," Tom Betts replied; showing that he at least had not been able to
+put out of his head the possibility of a storm.
+
+"Seems to me we must be getting somewhere," Phil observed.
+
+"It can't be very much further," Paul answered, feeling that the remark
+was addressed to him as the pilot of the expedition."
+
+"I should say not," came from Bluff, as chipper as a bird's song, and
+without the least sign of halt or break; "if we go on much more, we'll
+walk off the end of the island."
+
+Bobolink patted him on the back, as if to encourage him in well doing.
+
+"That's the stuff, Bluff; you c'n do it when you try," he whispered; "but
+as to steppin' into the lake, I guess we aren't that near the north end
+yet, by a good sight."
+
+Paul nodded his head, but said nothing; from that Bobolink knew the scout
+master agreed with him. They could go considerably longer without being
+halted by coming to the water's edge.
+
+Jack called the attention of his chums just then to something ahead.
+
+"Seems to me I smell smoke," he said, "and if you bend down here, so you
+can look under the branches of the trees, you'll see something that's got
+the shape of a shed, or cabin, off yonder."
+
+The others, upon making a try, agreed with Jack that it did seem that
+way.
+
+"Oh! we're right on top of the nest, all right" chattered Bobolink, but
+showing his wisdom by keeping his voice down to its lowest note; "and
+now, if we c'n duplicate that little dodge we played at the shack of the
+wild man, it's goin' to be as easy as turning over off a spring-board,
+with a ten foot drop."
+
+"But if we're caught we might get shot at," suggested Phil, as if the
+idea had struck him for the first time that they were really playing with
+fire, in thus bearding desperate lawbreakers in their den.
+
+"We aren't going to get caught," said Bobolink; "who's afraid? Not I.
+Lead along, Paul. I want to get this thing out of my system, so I c'n
+have a little rest up here," and he placed a hand on his brow.
+
+Although himself doubtful as to the wisdom of the move, Paul could not
+back down now, after allowing the boys to vote on the matter. Perhaps he
+was more or less sorry that at the time he had not exercised his
+privilege as scout master to put his foot down on their taking any more
+chances, just to satisfy such curiosity as reckless fellows like Bobolink
+might feel, with regard to the unknown men.
+
+It was too late now. Until some of the boys themselves manifested a
+desire to call the retreat, he must go on; although it began to seem more
+than ever audacious--this creeping up on a den of men who were hiding
+from the eye of the law in order to carry on their nefarious trade.
+
+And so they started to creep forward, now dodging behind trees, and
+crawling back of friendly patches of bushes whenever the chance presented
+itself. It was all exciting enough, to be sure, and doubtless gave the
+boys many a delightful little thrill.
+
+In this fashion they came upon a larger clump of trees and bushes, which,
+instead of trying to round, they concluded to pass through.
+
+It was just as they gained a point inside this clump that they were
+brought up with a round turn by discovering a couple of objects standing
+there, as though they had been left behind when the valuable contents
+which they formerly encased had been taken out.
+
+These were two large packing cases, of unusual shape, and made of heavy
+planed boards!
+
+Some of the scouts looked at them carelessly, for to them these objects
+did not carry any particular meaning. Not so Jack, Tom Betts and
+Bobolink. Those three boys had received a shock, as severe as it was
+unexpected.
+
+They recognized those cases as being the identical ones which had only
+lately reposed snugly in the planing mill of Jack's father in Stanhope,
+and to guard which one Hans Waggoner had been hired by the man who owned
+them, Professor Hackett! And as they stood there and gaped, doubtless
+among the many things that flashed into the minds of those three lads was
+the fact that _somebody_ had been trying to get to see what the contents
+of those mysterious cases might be; which person they now knew must have
+been a Government Secret Service man, a detective from Washington, on the
+track of the bold counterfeiting gang!
+
+All these things, and much more, flashed through the minds of Jack and
+his chums, as they stood there in that thicket, and stared hard at the
+two big cases bound around with twisted wire, but which had now been
+relieved of their unknown contents, for they stood empty.
+
+And the others, realizing that something had occurred out of the regular
+channel, waited for them to speak, and explain what they had discovered.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+TIME TO GO BACK
+
+
+"What is it, Bobolink--Jack?" asked the scout master.
+
+"The boxes yonder!" Bobolink managed to exclaim.
+
+"You evidently have seen them before; tell me, Jack, are they the ones
+you said your father stored for that man?" continued Paul.
+
+"They certainly look mighty like them," replied the other; "and you know,
+they were taken away that morning early. They must have been carried
+across country to the shore of the lake, and then ferried over in a
+rowboat. That was what we saw the marks of, and the four men walked off
+with these between them."
+
+"Whee! did you ever?" gasped the still bewildered Bobolink. "Yes, here
+you c'n see the markin' on the lid they threw away when they opened this
+one--'Professor Hackett, In care of John Stormways, Stanhope,' all as
+plain as anything. And to think how after all my worryin' the old boxes
+have bobbed up here. Don't it beat the Dutch how things turn out?"
+
+That seemed to be the one thing that gripped Bobolink's attention--the
+strange way in which those two heavy boxes with the twisted wire binding
+had happened to cross his path again.
+
+But Paul was thinking of other things, that might have a more serious
+bearing on the case. He turned to Jack again.
+
+"What do you know about this so-called professor?" he asked.
+
+"Me? Why, next to nothing, only that he comes from down near New York
+City at a place called Coney Island, where lots of fakirs hold out; and
+plenty of men too, in the summer season, who would want to circulate a
+little money that did not bear the Government stamp."
+
+"But your father seems to have known him; or at any rate believed he was
+a law-abiding citizen," pursued Paul; "otherwise he would hardly have
+given him the privilege of storing his cases in his mill over night."
+
+"Oh! my father is that easy-going, nearly anybody could pull the wool
+over his eyes. He believed the yarn this pretended professor told him,
+I've no doubt, and thought it next door to nothing to let him keep the
+boxes in the mill for a short time. You know, my father is the
+best-hearted man in Stanhope, barring none. But I agree with the rest of
+you that this time he must have got stung. The professor is sure a bad
+egg. I must put my dad wise as soon as I get half a chance."
+
+"Perhaps it's already too late to save him from getting stuck with a lot
+of the stuff they manufacture?" suggested Tom Betts.
+
+"Oh! that could hardly be so," Jack replied, cheerfully. "When these
+bogus money-makers want to get rid of some of their stock they always
+have go-betweens do the job for them. It would be too easy tracing things
+if they passed the stuff themselves. So I guess my dad hasn't taken in
+any great amount of the counterfeits."
+
+Bobolink was down on his knees. He even crawled into one of the
+overturned boxes, as though trying hard to ascertain from sundry marks
+what could have been contained under that wooden cover.
+
+He came out, shaking his head, as though his efforts had not been
+attended by success.
+
+"Looks like machinery of some kind, that's all I c'n tell," he admitted.
+"But of course, they'd need a press of some sort to work off the paper
+money on. Now, chances are, it's bein' put up right in that long shed
+yonder, that we c'n see. Question is, how're we goin' to get close enough
+to peek through a crack, and find out what's goin' on in there?"
+
+Again did most of the boys look uneasily at each other. Paul believed
+that, now the great test had arrived, they were beginning to weaken a
+little. No doubt it did not seem so glorious a thing when you got close
+up, this spying on a band of lawless men, who would be apt to deal
+harshly with eavesdroppers, if caught in the act.
+
+Still, he would not give the order to retreat unless they asked for it.
+They had been allowed to settle that matter when they voted; it was up to
+Bobolink, Tom, Bluff or Andy to start the ball rolling, if they began to
+reconsider their hasty conclusion of a while back.
+
+Bobolink looked toward the low, long shed, now plainly seen, in something
+of a rocky opening, with glimpses of water beyond which told how close to
+the shore it had been built. But he did not act as though as anxious to
+rush matters as before.
+
+"Why d'ye believe they ever landed those boxes where they did, and toted
+'em all the way up here, heavy as they were, when there's the water close
+by?" asked Jack.
+
+"I was thinking about that a minute ago," replied Paul; "and the only
+explanation I can find is this: Perhaps the water is mighty shallow all
+around up at the north end of the island. I can see that the shore is
+rocky, and if that's so, then no boat with a heavy load could get close
+enough in to land the stuff. And so they had to get busy, and carry the
+boxes, one at a time."
+
+"Sounds reasonable, and we'll let her go at that," commented Bobolink,
+who, as a rule, was contented to take Paul's opinion.
+
+Paul himself stooped down to take a look into the cases. He did not make
+any remark as he straightened up again, nor did any of the others think
+to ask his opinion; which possibly may have been lucky, for perhaps Paul
+would not have liked to commit himself just then. If he had found
+anything that gave him a new clue, he was evidently keeping it to himself
+until he could get more proof.
+
+"S'pose we ought to make a fresh start," suggested Bobolink, but with a
+lack of eagerness that was plainly noticeable; it was as though the
+discovery of those two mysterious boxes under such strange conditions had
+rather cooled his ardor.
+
+"That's so," remarked Tom.
+
+"We've g-g-got so n-n-near now, we ought to f-f-finish!" Bluff declared.
+
+And yet none of them made the slightest movement looking to an advance, a
+fact that Paul could not help but notice, and which warned him they were
+close to the point of a change of policy. A suggestion that they give up
+the spy business at this stage, and retreat in good order to their camp,
+would doubtless have met with favor, and been sure of a unanimous vote.
+
+But still Paul, having his own notions of such matters, when dealing with
+boys, declined to say anything. If one of the four who were mainly
+responsible for their being there should take it upon himself to offer
+such a motion, he would only too gladly put it to a vote. Until such time
+came he must continue to remain silent.
+
+"Just as you say, boys; I'm carrying out your plans," he remarked,
+quietly, wishing to let them know that they had it in their own power to
+alter conditions at any time they so desired.
+
+They all finally moved after the scout master, even if some feet did lag
+a little. Bluff and Phil particularly were conscious of a strange sinking
+sensation in the region of their hearts, which they mistrusted signified
+fear; and rather than have any of their comrades suspect that they had a
+cold hand pressing there, they shut their teeth hard together, and
+determined that under no circumstances would they show the white feather.
+
+So Paul led them on.
+
+Again they tried to conceal themselves as best they might in devious
+ways. Here the wide and generous trunk of a friendly tree afforded them
+a certain amount of shelter; a little further on a small pile of rocks
+answered the same benevolent purpose; but always the main idea was to
+hide from any curious eyes that might be on the lookout in the
+vicinity of that queer looking shed--newly made, if the fresh boards
+signified anything.
+
+"Looky here! there's a man!" suddenly exclaimed Bobolink.
+
+The others had discovered the man at about the same time. They all lay
+flat and hardly dared breathe, lest in some manner they attract the
+attention of the stranger, who seemed to be not only a big man, but
+rather a fierce-looking fellow in the bargain.
+
+He was glancing all around at the heavens, as though wondering whether
+the aeroplane was not coming back, whatever its mission in flying away
+south could have been. Standing there, he shaded his eyes with his
+hands and continued to look toward the south for several minutes. Then
+he made a gesture as of disappointment, and vanished around the corner
+of the shed.
+
+"Never looked down this way once!" Bobolink said triumphantly, as though
+their escape had caused his spirits to rise a little.
+
+"That leaves the coast clear again, anyhow," said Tom Betts, as if he now
+had a rather disagreeable duty to perform, which, since it had to be
+done, had better be gotten through with as speedily as possible.
+
+When leaving camp these brave scouts had never dreamed but that
+spying upon the enemy would prove the most delightful task imaginable.
+Even later on, when they had voted to keep moving forward, with so
+much assurance, the picture had not begun to fade; but now it did not
+seem the same.
+
+As the shelter grew less and less, however, it became evident that
+presently, if they continued to advance in this fashion, they must reach
+a point where, in order to make progress, they must expose themselves to
+hostile eyes, should any be on the watch.
+
+Would even this cause one of the four scouts to "take water," as Bobolink
+called it, and make the sign that he had had enough?
+
+Paul knew them all pretty well, and he also realized the fact that every
+fellow possessed a nature bordering on the stubborn. It was the dread of
+being thought cowardly that kept them from taking the cue from Paul, and
+ending this foolish advance.
+
+They had gone over fifty feet since the last stop, and passed the last
+large tree which could be looked on to give them any shelter.
+
+It was just at this moment that once again the big man was seen coming
+hastily around the corner of the shed.
+
+At sight of him the boys stood still. There was no use trying to hide
+now. Perhaps some faint hope took possession of them that they might be
+unnoticed if they did not move; just as the still hunter, stalking a
+feeding deer, will watch its short tail, and whenever he sees it twitch
+he stands perfectly motionless; for he knows that the animal is about to
+raise his head, and that he will probably be taken for a stump if he does
+not move hand or foot.
+
+But evidently the man had sighted the seven khaki-clad scouts. He seemed
+almost petrified with amazement at first, and stood staring at them. As
+if awaking from his trance, he began to make frantic motions with his
+arms, and at the same time shouted hoarsely at them:
+
+"Go back! Get out of that! You're crazy staying there! Run, I tell you,
+while you have the chance! Get away! Get away, you fools!"
+
+The scouts looked at each other in astonishment. What could it all mean?
+Were all the men on this queer island stark, staring crazy? He called
+them that, but it is always a rule for mad people to believe every one
+else crazy but themselves.
+
+"Say, what does the guy mean?" cried Bobolink, who seemed to be utterly
+unable to understand a thing; "mebbe it's a small-pox hospital we've run
+on, fellows!"
+
+But Paul was beginning to see a light. Possibly the excited gestures, as
+well as the urgent words of the big man, may have assisted him to arrive
+at a conclusion.
+
+He no longer felt so decided about not speaking the word that would
+cause his little detachment to turn and retreat. There must be danger
+hovering over them, danger in some terrible form, to make that unknown
+man so urgent.
+
+"Let's get out of this, boys!" he called, "every fellow turn, and streak
+it as fast as he can. And get behind trees as quick as you can,
+because--"
+
+They had already started to obey the scout master, and possibly had
+covered a few jumps when it seemed that the very earth shook and quivered
+under them, as a fearful roar almost deafened every boy.
+
+Just as you have seen a pack of cards, made into tent shape in a curving
+row, go falling down when the first one is touched, so those seven scouts
+were knocked flat by some concussion of the air.
+
+They had hardly fallen than one and all scrambled to their feet, and fled
+madly from the scene, as if fearful lest the whole end of the island
+might be blown up behind them, and catch them in a trap from which there
+could be no escape.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+HONORABLE SCARS
+
+
+So it turned out after all that the scout master did not have to change
+his mind, and give the order for retreat. When that dreadful panic
+overwhelmed the scouts, it was really a case of "every one for himself."
+
+Either by rare good luck, or some sort of instinct, the seven lads
+managed to keep pretty well together as they ran. Not a single fellow
+dreamed of allowing himself to get separated from his comrades. It seemed
+to be a case of "united we stand, divided we fall," or "in union there is
+strength."
+
+If in their mad rush some of the boys collided with trees, or stumbled
+over obstacles that they failed to discover in time, they were not of a
+mind to let such trifles interfere with their making record time.
+
+In such cases it was only necessary to scramble erect again, and put on a
+little extra spurt in order to overhaul their comrades.
+
+What had taken them half an hour to cover when they were "scouting" in
+such approved fashion, was passed over in about five minutes.
+
+It was Paul who came to his senses first. He realized that there was no
+one chasing them and that, to tell the truth, not one of the boys could
+have been seriously hurt by what had befallen.
+
+So he began to laugh, and the sound reaching the ears of the others,
+appeared to act on their excited minds like soothing balm.
+
+Gradually the whole lot slackened their pace until they were going at a
+jog trot; which in turn settled down to a walk.
+
+Finally Bobolink came to a full stop.
+
+"Whee! let's get a few decent breaths, fellows!" he managed to gasp.
+
+The others were apparently nothing loth, and so they all drew up in a
+bunch. A sorry lot they looked just then, to tell the truth. It seemed as
+though nearly every fellow had some distinguishing mark.
+
+Phil's rather aristocratic face had a long scratch that extended down the
+right side, and gave him a queer look; Jack was caressing a lump on his
+forehead, which he may have received from a tree, or else when he was
+knocked down without warning by that singular explosion; Andy was trying
+to quench a nose-bleed, and needed his face washed the worst way; Bluff's
+left eye seemed partly closed, as if he had been too close to the
+business end of an angry bee; while Bobolink had two or three small cuts
+about his face that made him look as if he had been trying to tattoo
+himself--with wretched success.
+
+So they looked at one another, and each thought the balance of the crowd
+had the appearance of a set of lunatics on the rampage.
+
+Hardly had they stared at each other than they set to laughing.
+
+"Oh! my stars! but aren't you a screamer though, Andy, with all that
+blood smeared over your face; and Bluff, why he looks as if he'd been in
+a prize fight!" was the way Bobolink expressed his feelings, bending over
+as he laughed.
+
+"Huh! you're not so very pretty yourself!" replied Bluff, with not the
+slightest sign of an impediment in his speech--evidently it had been
+frightened out of his system for the time being. "Anybody'd think you
+were a South Sea Islander on the warpath. And wouldn't they cross over to
+the other side of the road in a hurry if they met you! Say, if Mazie
+Kenwood or Laura Carson could only see you now, they'd give you the cut
+straight."
+
+"Look at Jack's bump, would you?" Tom Betts exclaimed.
+
+"Don't call attention to me any more than you can help," Jack remarked,
+making a wry face, as he caressed the protuberance on his forehead; "it
+feels as big as a walnut, let me tell you, and hurts like fun. The sooner
+I'm back in camp, so I can slap some witch hazel on that lump, the better
+it'll please me, boys."
+
+After a little more laughing and grumbling, Paul, who had escaped without
+any visible hurts, though he walked a little lame, remarked:
+
+"Well, do we start right back again, and take a look-in on those men?
+Don't everybody speak at once, now!"
+
+All the same they did, and the burden of the united protest was that
+circumstances alter cases; that they had arrived at the conclusion that
+what those men were doing on the island could be no affair of honest,
+law-abiding scouts; and that as for them, the camp in the sink offered
+more attractions at that particular moment than anything else they
+could think of.
+
+Of course that settled it. The scouting was over for that occasion. They
+had done themselves credit, as far as it went; but then, who would ever
+dream that they would come within an ace of being blown sky-high with the
+whole upper end of the island?
+
+As if by common consent, they started to move forward again, and every
+fellow seemed to know, as if by instinct, which was south, and
+whereabouts the camp was, for they needed no pilot now.
+
+And as they journeyed they talked it all over. Every boy seemed to have
+an opinion of his own with regard to what had happened, and they differed
+radically.
+
+"Tell you what," said Tom Betts, who had also escaped with only a few
+minor injuries, because he was as quick as a cat, and must have fallen on
+a soft piece of ground besides; "tell you what, I thought that old hill
+had turned into a volcano, and just bust all to flinders."
+
+"Well, now," Phil admitted, "I somehow had an idea that storm had chased
+up when we didn't chance to be watching, and lightning had struck a tree
+close to the place where we happened to be standing looking at that crazy
+man wave his arms."
+
+"Me?" Bobolink remarked; "why, I was dead sure what we guessed about a
+war game bein' played up here between two pretended hostile armies was
+right; and that one of 'em had blown up the fort of the other. You see,
+that aeroplane had a sorter military air about it, even if I didn't see
+it. And I'm not sure yet it isn't that."
+
+"One thing sure," remarked Paul; "the man was trying to warn us to keep
+back, for he knew some sort of mine was going to explode, and that we
+might be killed. As it was, we got off pretty lucky, I think. This sprain
+will heal in a day or two; but if a rock weighing a ton or two had
+dropped down on me, I guess the chances of my ever seeing Stanhope again
+would have been mighty slim."
+
+"But tell me," Bobolink asked, "what in the world would counterfeiters
+want with exploding mines, and doin' all that sort of thing? Just
+remember that big bang we had the other night, that woke everybody up.
+Shows it's a habit with 'em, and that this wasn't some freak accident.
+Gee! my head's buzzing around so I can't think straight. Somebody do my
+guessin' for me; won't you, please?"
+
+"That's right," said Tom Betts, suddenly; "who are these men, anyway?
+P'raps we didn't size 'em up straight when we made up our minds they were
+bogus money-makers. Mebbe they happen to be a different sort of crowd
+altogether. How about that, Paul; am I off my trolley when I say that?"
+
+"I've been beginning to believe something was crooked in our guess for a
+little while, Tom," replied the scout master; "but all the same, you've
+got me up in the air when you ask who and what they are. I'm rattled more
+than I've been in many a day, to be honest with you all."
+
+Bobolink took out something from his pocket. He stared hard at the two
+shining quarters, and jingled them in his hand.
+
+"Look good to me," he was heard to say; "I'd pass 'em any time for
+genuine. But what silly chump'd be throwing good money around like
+that, tell me?"
+
+"Or bad money either, Bobolink," remarked Paul; "so you see, it was an
+accident in any case. You've lost money many a time out of your pocket;
+well, this man was in the same boat. Chances are, that's straight goods."
+
+Bobolink grinned.
+
+"If that's so," he remarked calmly, "I'm in a half dollar, and that's
+some satisfaction. But say, what a time we'll have tellin' the boys. Wow!
+I can see the eyes of Little Billie, and Curly, and Nuthin just stickin'
+out of their heads when they hear all we've run up against."
+
+"And we'd better move along a little faster while about it,"
+observed Paul.
+
+"Why? Hope you don't think any of those men are chasin' after us; or that
+we'll run up against that wild man, or the big yellow dog again?"
+Bobolink inquired, glancing fearfully about him.
+
+"No, I was considering the feelings of the boys," replied the
+scout master.
+
+"That's a fact," Jack went on, "they'll be worried about us, after
+hearing that terrible report, and think something has happened to our
+crowd. But we're not a great way from camp now, Paul."
+
+"No, and if the distance was greater, I'd stop long enough to send up a
+smoke signal that would tell Jud we were all right. But that'd take time,
+and perhaps we'd better hurry along," and the scout master set a new
+pace, even though limping slightly.
+
+"Got hurt some yourself; did you, Paul?" Jack asked, solicitously.
+
+"Oh! only a little sprain, but it happens to be on a muscle that I have
+to use when I walk, and you know a fellow favors such a pain. But I can
+see where the sink lies now; we'll be there in ten minutes, perhaps
+half that."
+
+They continued to push on. For the time being most of them forgot about
+their personal troubles, in their anxiety to join their comrades. And
+Bobolink, as he walked beside Jack, spoke what was on his mind:
+
+"It was a grand old scare, all right, and one we won't ever forget,
+believe me; but there's one thing that tickles me half to death, Jack. We
+know _now_ where the queer old boxes went to, even if we are up in the
+air about what was in them. And the chances are we may find that out
+before we're done with this business; because those men ought to come
+down and ask if anybody got hurt by their silly Fourth of July fireworks
+display. There's the camp, boys. Whoopee!"
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+ANOTHER THREATENING PERIL
+
+
+Loud cheers greeted the appearance of the seven scouts, as they hurried
+forward into the camp. And when those who had remained with the tents saw
+the various scratches, contusions and bumps that adorned most of the
+returned boys' faces, they were burning with eagerness to hear the
+details of the adventure.
+
+Such a clatter of tongues as ensued, as every fellow tried to tell his
+version of the happening. If half that was said were written down, it
+would require many more chapters to give the details.
+
+Gradually, however, each stay-at-home scout began to get a pretty clear
+idea of the series of adventures that had befallen their mates in trying
+to explore the mysteries of the island. They understood all about the
+wild man, and what the consensus among the seven explorers seemed to be
+concerning the strangers who occupied the island, and were conducting
+such an amazing series of experiments, even making use of an aeroplane to
+accomplish their ends.
+
+The guesses that followed were legion, yet Paul, who listened patiently
+to the most astounding theories, shook his head in the end.
+
+"I don't believe any of us have hit on the right thing yet, fellows," he
+said. "But there's meat in a number of the guesses you've made, and
+perhaps we'll get the story after a while. But how about grub; we're as
+hungry as bears?"
+
+"Never expected to join you at lunch, for a fact," grinned Bobolink; "but
+then, we made better time than we ever thought we could on the return
+journey. Talk to me about a prize spurrin' a fellow on to do his level
+best--the whip that does it is to put a first-class scare in him. Then
+you're goin' to see some runnin' that takes the cake. Wheel didn't we
+sprint, though? Bet you I jumped clear over a log that stood six feet
+high from the ground--more or less."
+
+It happened that the stay-at-home scouts had just prepared their noon
+meal at the time the explosion occurred that made the whole island
+tremble. That had startled them so much that they had not had the
+heart to think of sitting down because of anxiety about the fate of
+their chums.
+
+And so the dinner had remained untouched up to the time they heard the
+"cooee" of the returning warriors; and then caught the bark of the fox,
+that told them that Paul and his posse had returned.
+
+There was enough for all, because the cooks were very liberal in making
+up their messes. And over the dinner more suggestions were made as to
+what their future course ought to be.
+
+By now even the fire-eating Bobolink was ready to cry quits, and
+back down; nor did he seem at all ashamed to admit the fact that he
+was afraid.
+
+"If those sillies mean to blow up the whole island, some way or other,
+why, what's the use of us stayin' here, an' goin' up with it, I'd like to
+know?" he said. "Tell you what, I've got another guess comin', and it's
+this: P'raps they're meanin' to get rid of this island and lake, and have
+started to do the job. Mebbe some big railroad wants a short line across
+country, and this thing is right in their way. I've heard of 'em doin'
+bigger things than just blowing up a little island; haven't you, Paul?"
+
+He always appealed to the scout master when one of his brilliant thoughts
+came along. Paul nodded his head.
+
+"That sounds more reasonable than a whole lot of things I've been
+listening to, Bobolink, for a fact," Paul admitted. "Still, we don't
+know, and there's no way to find out the true story, right now.
+Listen, fellows!"
+
+"Thunder, away off, Paul; guess we've all got explosions on the brain,
+because it gave me a start, too," said Jack, laughing.
+
+"And if a storm's coming along," observed Jud Elderkin, who seemed vastly
+pleased when he heard that his signalling had been so easily understood,
+"why, I reckon we ought not to think of pulling down our good tents, and
+getting out of here, till she's over."
+
+It was plain from this that the scouts had determined to abandon their
+dangerous island, and spend the balance of the outing by making a camp on
+the mainland, where at least there was a reasonable expectation of not
+being blown sky-high by some explosion.
+
+"And since we're done eating perhaps we'd better take another look at the
+tent pins, to make sure they'll hold when the wind strikes us. Some of
+these summer storms have a lively advance breeze, you know, boys," Paul
+suggested.
+
+"Little Billie and I'll go over to the boats, and see that the curtains
+are buttoned down snug. Some of us can stay inside while its rainin' and
+that'll give more room in the tents," Bobolink remarked, jumping to his
+feet, with a return of his customary lively Way.
+
+"And in this sink we'll be protected from any wind coming from the south,
+don't you think, Paul?" Jack ventured.
+
+"Couldn't be better," was the reply. "Those trees and bushes, as well as
+the rise in the ground, will help a lot. But get busy, fellows, with
+those tent pins. I'll take the axe, and go the rounds myself, to make
+doubly sure. It's not the nicest thing in the world to have your canvas
+blow away--eh, Nuthin?"
+
+"You're right, it isn't," replied the little scout, "'specially when it
+lifts you right up with it into a tree, and has you tied up there in the
+snarls of a clothes line. I know all about that, and none of the rest of
+you ever tried it. Excuse me from another balloon ride like that."
+
+In a short time everything was done that could be thought of to render
+things storm-proof. Then the boys went over to the edge of the water to
+watch the advance of the black clouds, which those at the boats in the
+little cove declared was a sight worth seeing.
+
+And it certainly was, all the scouts admitted. Some of them were filled
+with a certain awe, as they saw how inky the clouds looked. But what boy,
+or man either, for that matter, is there who has not felt this sensation
+when watching scurrying clouds that tell of an approaching storm?
+
+By degrees the boys began to drift back to the camp. Every sort of excuse
+was given for leaving the beach. One fellow suddenly remembered that he
+had left his coat hanging on a bush, another had forgotten to fasten his
+knapsack, while a third wished to tie his blanket in a roll, in case the
+water did find a way to get into the sink.
+
+Paul, Jack, Bobolink and Jud remained until they saw the rough water away
+down near the southern shore of the lake, and understood that the first
+squall must be swooping upon them. Then they too gave up the vigil, for
+the chances were the rain would come with the first breeze.
+
+With a howl and a roar the storm broke upon them. Cowering in the tents,
+about four in each, as the others had taken to the boats, they waited
+with more or less suspense what might happen.
+
+The wind made the canvas shake at a lively clip, and the fastenings on
+the southern side were sorely tried; but they had been well taken care of
+and Paul called out that he believed they were going to hold.
+
+For half an hour the rain beat down in torrents. None of them remembered
+ever hearing such a deluge descend, but perhaps their imaginations were
+excited on account of the peculiar conditions that surrounded them. All
+the same it rained, and then rained some more, until a very large
+quantity of water must have fallen, all of them decided.
+
+With Paul and Jack in the tent that was nearest to the lake were
+Bobolink, Tom Betts and Nuthin.
+
+"Seems to me it's gettin' kind of damp in here," remarked Bobolink,
+when the clamor outside had died down somewhat, and they could hear each
+other talk.
+
+"That's a fact," declared Paul; "and after all it's just as well that we
+made sure our blankets and other things were tied up and hung away from
+the ground. But seems to me I hear one of the fellows in the boat
+shouting to us."
+
+When he opened the flap he found that the rain had almost stopped, as
+well as the wind to a great extent. Perhaps the storm was over.
+
+"Hello!" Paul called out.
+
+"Hey! that you, Paul?" came in a voice he recognized as belonging to Jud,
+who had been one of those in charge of the nearby boats.
+
+"Yes, what's wrong?" asked the scout master.
+
+"Can't you come over here? Going to be the dickens to pay, I reckon. The
+bally old lake's rising like fun. Looks like the outlet must have got
+stopped up somehow. You're sure going to have to move your tents mighty
+quick. Coming, Paul?"
+
+"All right," answered the other, as he crawled out, and started under the
+dripping trees for the spot where the two motorboats lay in the cove,
+sheltered from the waves that had been dashing against the shore
+elsewhere.
+
+When he reached the spot he found that all of the boys who had been
+sheltered in the boats were lined up on the shore, where they could see
+down the lake. Jud himself seemed to be watching the water steal up a
+stick he had thrust into the sand.
+
+"Gee! she's mounting like fun!" he exclaimed. "Water must be pouring into
+the old lake from every side, and little gettin' out. Say, if this keeps
+on, the whole island, except that hill up yonder, will be under water
+before night. It sets rather low, you understand, Paul."
+
+The scout master was naturally thrilled by these words. He knew that the
+leader of the Gray Fox Patrol was no alarmist, and that he seldom lost
+his head in times of excitement.
+
+And so it was with considerable apprehension that Paul stooped down so he
+might see just how fast the lake was rising. And when he noticed that it
+actually crept up the stick before his very eyes, he knew that what Jud
+had said about the whole island being covered might not be such a silly
+assertion after all.
+
+It began to look as though the adventures of the scouts had not yet
+reached an end, and that they were in for another thrilling experience.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+PREPARED FOR THE WORST
+
+
+"She's just walking up hand over fist; eh, Paul?" asked Jud.
+
+"No question about it, Jud," came the reply as the scout master cast an
+apprehensive look across the half-mile of water that separated them from
+the outlet of the lake. "I'd give something to know what's happened down
+there, to dam this water up, and just how far it's going to rise on us."
+
+"Tell you what," said Bobolink, who had followed Paul when he left the
+tent, as had also the rest of the occupants, "I wouldn't be a bit
+surprised if that awful explosion shook the shoulder of earth and rock
+down, that we saw hanging above the mouth of the Radway River where she
+leaves the lake."
+
+"You've hit it, I do believe!" cried Paul, exultantly; "and that's just
+what did happen, chances are, fellows."
+
+"But if the outlet is filled up," said Jud, "and this water keeps pouring
+in on four sides, it's dead sure the blooming lake will fill up in short
+order. What had we better do, Paul?"
+
+"That's just what I'm trying to figure on, Jud," answered the other;
+"it's one of two things--either hike out for the hill, where we'll be
+safe until the water goes down; or else get our things aboard the boats,
+and stay here."
+
+"That last strikes me as the best of all!" declared Jack.
+
+"Besides," broke in Nuthin, "we don't want to lose those boats, you know.
+They were loaned to us and if we let 'em go to smash, wouldn't it take us
+a long time to pay the bill, though? Besides, we'll need 'em to get away
+from here."
+
+"That isn't the worst of it," remarked Paul, who was very serious.
+
+"Why, what is there besides?" demanded Bobolink.
+
+"Suppose the water does get up so as to cover the island, all but the
+hill," the scout master went on deliberately, as though making sure of
+his ground as he talked; "and then, all of a sudden the weight of it
+broke through the dam; don't you see the suction, as the water rushed
+out, would be something _terrific_. No rope ever made, I reckon, could
+hold these boats back. They'd sure be drawn through the gap, and carried
+on the flood, any old way, even upside-down, maybe."
+
+"Whew!" whistled Bobolink; and as for some of the other fellows, they
+began to lose their usual color as they realized what Paul was saying.
+
+"Now, that's just an idea that came into my mind," Paul went on, seeing
+that he had alarmed some of the scouts. "It may never happen, you
+understand. But you know the motto we believe in is 'be prepared!' That
+means never to take things for granted. Keep your eyes and ears always on
+guard, and see lots of things, even before they swoop down on you. So,
+it's up to us, fellows, to get our tents and other fixings loaded up as
+soon as we can. After that we'll go aboard ourselves, and try to prepare
+against a sudden break in the dam."
+
+"And lookin' at that water creeping up," remarked Jud, "the sooner we get
+busy, the better."
+
+Accordingly, they all hastened back to the camp. It was found that
+already the water seemed to be creeping into the sink. Those in the other
+two tents were talking it over, and wondering what was about to happen.
+
+When they heard the latest news, their faces indicated both astonishment
+and not a little alarm. But under the direction of the scout master, they
+started to convey all their belongings to the boats.
+
+First the blankets and clothes bags were taken over; then the food and
+cooking utensils; and finally the tents came down in a hurry, for the
+boys were working in water almost up to their knees when this last part
+of the job was concluded.
+
+Once out of the sink, they found plenty of high ground to walk on, while
+carrying the wet tents to the landing where the boats were lying.
+
+After they were all aboard, the scouts packed the stuff as best they
+could, so that it would take up as little space as possible. Meanwhile
+Paul and Jack, with both the other patrol leaders, were trying to figure
+out just what would be the best course for them to pursue.
+
+"Makes me think of old Noah, when he went aboard the ark, and the animals
+they followed two by two," said Bobolink, with a chuckle.
+
+"Huh, call yourself a kangaroo, or a monkey, if you like," spoke up Old
+Dan Tucker, "but as for me I'd rather play the part of Ham, or one of the
+other sons."
+
+"Sure thing!" assented Bobolink, cheerfully; "never saw the time yet
+when you raised any kick about takin' the part of Ham. Sounds good,
+don't it, Dan?"
+
+It was pretty hard to keep the spirits of Bobolink from sizzling and
+gushing forth like a fountain when the water is turned on. He could joke,
+even while the several leaders of the expedition were consulting gravely
+about their chances of holding the boats against the frightful suction of
+the current, when the obstructions in the outlet of the lake gave way,
+which they hoped would not be suddenly, but by degrees.
+
+It was certainly a condition that confronted them, and not a theory. Paul
+was really more worried than he showed; for he kept his feelings under
+control, knowing that if some of the others realized how much he was
+concerned, the fact might create a panic.
+
+"If I really thought the worst would come," Paul said, in a low tone, to
+Jack, after it had been concluded that they would stay by the boats, and
+do the best they could, "why I'd be tempted to give the order to just cut
+for the hill, and leave everything but some food behind. Once up there,
+we would be safe, and that's what we can't say is the case now."
+
+"But even if the water goes out with a rush, it can't tear a tree like
+this one up by the roots; can it?" asked Jack, pointing to where the
+cables of the boats had been secured as strongly as possible.
+
+"That's so," replied the scout master; "but then, think of the ropes, and
+what a terrible strain would come on them. I'm afraid both would snap
+like pipe-stems. To hold tight, we'd need a big chain; or a hawser like
+that one the switching engine on the railroad uses to drag cars on a
+parallel track. But then, the water may be nearly as high, right now, as
+it will get We'll hope so, anyhow."
+
+That was Paul's way of trying to look on the bright side, although he
+never failed to prepare for the worst, even while expecting the best.
+
+"If we could only think up some way to help ease the strain, it would be
+a good thing," observed Jack, thoughtfully.
+
+"I wish you could. It would ease my mind more than I care to tell you,"
+was Paul's answer.
+
+"One thing, the storm is over," called out Jud, just then; "see, there's
+a break in the clouds, and I reckon the sun will be peepin' out soon."
+
+"But the water will keep on rushing down the sides of the hills away off
+yonder," Paul remarked, "and filling up this cup until it runs over. They
+say that the Radway River drains three times the amount of country that
+our own Bushkill does. And by the way the water comes in here, I believe
+it. Look out there on the lake, will you; it shows that it's getting
+wider right now."
+
+"Why, in another half hour, if it keeps on the same way, it's going to
+lap over pretty much all the lower part of the island," Jack declared.
+
+Everything else was neglected now, and the scouts gathered along the side
+of each boat, watching the lake. It was as if they half expected to see
+the water suddenly take to rushing toward the spot where they knew the
+peculiar outlet lay, not more than twenty feet across, and with abrupt
+sides, one of which had been partly overhanging the water at the time
+they entered.
+
+It was, of course, this section which must have been dislodged by the
+blast which shook the surrounding territory, filling the bed of the
+stream, and causing the rapidly accumulating waters of the lake to back
+up, since they could find no place to discharge, as usual.
+
+It was while they were moodily watching the waste of waters that one of
+the scouts, who had wandered across to the other side of the _Comfortt_
+suddenly sounded a fresh alarm, that sent another thrill to the hearts of
+the already excited boys.
+
+"Hey! here's a lot of men comin' down on us, fellows I They're meanin' to
+capture our boats, just like pirates. Boarders ahoy! Get busy everybody.
+Clubs are trumps!"
+
+As they rushed to the other side, some having to clamber over the heaps
+of duffle that took up so much room aboard, the scouts saw that it was no
+false alarm. A number of men were hurrying toward them, splashing through
+water that was in places almost knee deep, even when they took the upper
+levels. Should they make a blunder, and stray off the ridges, it was
+likely they would speedily have to swim for it.
+
+Paul was considerably aroused at first. They did not know very much
+about these mysterious people of the island; and after their recent
+rough experience, most of the boys were decidedly averse to knowing
+anything more of them. And yet, here they were hurrying toward the
+two motor-boats, as though they might indeed have some desperate
+idea in view.
+
+Perhaps they meant to capture the boats, so as to insure their escape
+from the rising waters. And then again, it seemed at least possible
+that they might want to keep the scouts from telling what strange
+things they had seen.
+
+So the first thing Paul did when he had that glimpse of the oncoming men,
+was to hasten to possess himself of his double-barreled shotgun. Not that
+he expected that there would be any necessity for firing it, but it was
+apt to inspire a certain amount of respect.
+
+And the balance of the scouts had made haste to arm themselves with
+whatever they could find that would help hold the enemy at bay. Some had
+brought their clubs aboard, others seized upon the push poles, while one
+grabbed up the camp axe, and another seized upon the hatchet.
+
+When eighteen husky and determined lads line the sides of two boats,
+prepared to give a good account of themselves, it must needs be brave men
+who would dare try to clamber aboard.
+
+And it was about this time, when things were looking rather
+squally around the floating homes of the scouts, that Paul noticed
+something singular.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+LIFTING THE LID
+
+Three men could be seen splashing desperately through the water; and they
+seemed to be carrying a fourth, who was lying on a rude sort of litter,
+as though he might either be sick, or badly hurt.
+
+And so it flashed through Paul's mind that perhaps after all their
+mission was not one of conquest, or even hostility, but that they were
+seeking help.
+
+"Hold up, fellows," he hastened to say; "we'll have to let them come
+aboard now, because they never could get back to the hill again, with the
+water rising so fast. Besides, I think they've got a wounded man along,
+and need help. Don't forget we're scouts, and always ready to hold out a
+helping hand."
+
+"That's the ticket!" declared the impulsive Bobolink, forgetting his
+warlike disposition when he saw the man on the litter.
+
+So Paul beckoned to the men to approach. He had already made the
+discovery that one of those who bore the litter was the big man who had
+waved them away with such violent gestures, just before the terrible
+explosion, when they happened to get too near the mine that was being
+fired for some strange purpose.
+
+Two minutes later, and still splashing through water that came almost up
+to their hips, those who bore the injured man arrived close to the boats.
+
+"Why, it's Professor Hackett who's being carried!" exclaimed Jack.
+
+The small man on the litter, who looked very white, lifted his head with
+an effort, and tried to wave his hand.
+
+"Yes, that's who it is; and you're Jack Stormways; aren't you? Oh! I hope
+that chum of yours can do something to stop this bleeding; I made them
+carry me down here as a last chance. My man who was sent for a doctor in
+our aeroplane, has not come back, and we're afraid he had an accident.
+Can some of you boys help lift me aboard? I'm very weak from loss of
+blood, and nearly gone."
+
+His voice was as faint as a whisper; and indeed, it was a wonder that he
+managed to speak at all.
+
+The scouts had quite forgotten everything but that there was some one in
+trouble. Tender hands immediately were forthcoming to assist in raising
+litter and man over the side of the boat. Then the three attendants
+climbed aboard, and strange to say the scouts seemed to have forgotten
+all their fear of the men they had believed to be lawbreakers. For now
+they saw that they were an intelligent lot of men, who bore little
+resemblance to such criminals as they had seemed to be.
+
+Paul had long been interested in surgery. His father was the leading
+doctor of Stanhope, and had always encouraged this fancy in the boy. It
+seemed that the professor chanced to remember that he had been told about
+the ability of Jack Stormways' chum; and when matters began to look
+desperate, since none of his assistants could seem to stop the flow of
+blood that followed his accident, as a last resort he had forced them to
+put him on a litter, and make for the spot where they knew the scouts had
+their camp, the man in the aeroplane having signaled the fact back to
+them, just as Paul suspected.
+
+Of course they had not dreamed of such a thing as the lake rising, until
+they had gone too far to retreat; and then they took desperate chances of
+finding the boys still there, where they had boats with which they could
+go to the mainland.
+
+Paul busied himself immediately. It was a pretty bad wound that the
+little man had received, and his left arm would be practically useless
+the balance of time; but he cared not for this, if only his life might
+be spared.
+
+Jack and Jud assisted whenever their services were needed and in the end
+Paul had not only stopped the flow of blood, but had the injured arm
+neatly bandaged--as well, the professor weakly declared, as any surgeon
+could have done.
+
+"And now," said Paul, turning on the big man, who had hovered around
+anxiously, watching what was being done, as though he thought a great
+deal of the professor; "in return for what we've done, won't you please
+tell us who and what you are, and why you're doing all these queer stunts
+away up here on this lonely island, where nobody can see you? We're all
+mixed up, and don't know what to think. At first we believed you must be
+a lot of counterfeiters hiding from the Government agents; but what with
+these explosions, and such things as aeroplanes, I'm getting it in my
+head that it means you're trying out some big sensations that are going
+to be sprung on the Coney Island public next season."
+
+"And that's where you made a pretty clever guess, my boy," said the big
+man, as he settled down to take it a bit more easily after his recent
+hard work; "Professor Hackett has invented most of the biggest sensations
+seen at seaside resorts these last ten years. He expects to excel his
+record next season, and then retire; and I tell you, now, I began to
+think he'd retire another way, if he lost much more blood from that
+wound, which he got by accident this morning."
+
+The scouts looked at each other, and a broad smile appeared on many a
+face that only a short time before had been pale with apprehension.
+
+When a thing that has seemed a dark mystery is finally explained, it
+often looks so easy and simple that all of us wonder how we ever could
+have bothered our heads over such a puzzle. And so it was in this case.
+Why did it come that no one had guessed the true explanation before, when
+it was so easy?
+
+They began to tell the big man all about their experiences, and how so
+many things seemed to make it appear that the strangers were hiding
+from officers.
+
+"How about that fellow who was hanging around my father's mill that night
+you had your two big boxes stored there?" Jack asked.
+
+"He represented a rival inventor, who has always been jealous of
+Professor Hackett, and is forever trying to find out what he has on the
+stocks," replied the big man, whose name they learned was Mr. Jameson, an
+able assistant to the inventor of aerial bombs, brilliant exploding
+mines, and a dozen other wonders that thrill audiences at the seashore
+each season.
+
+"But wouldn't he be likely to follow the wagon when it took the boxes
+away in the morning?" the boy continued to ask.
+
+"Oh! we put him on a false scent, by shipping two other boxes away on a
+train," was the reply. "He must have gone two hundred miles before he
+discovered his mistake; and I doubt very much if he knows yet, but is
+watching those cases to see what we do with them, away out in western New
+York State."
+
+"Er, how about these?" asked Bobolink, jingling the two shining quarters
+in his hand. "I picked 'em up close to that field smithy you have on the
+island. We thought they were the best counterfeits we ever saw. I guess
+they are."
+
+"I lost a bunch of small change through a hole in my pocket," laughed the
+man, "and so I judge those are a part of it. But keep them as souvenirs
+of your wonderful adventures on Cedar Island. Every time you look at them
+you'll remember that narrow escape you and your friends had when you came
+near stepping on a mine, the fuse of which had been lighted; for
+Professor Hackett, even while he was wounded, would not hear of us
+stopping our work."
+
+"Thanks," replied the gratified Bobolink, again pocketing the quarters
+that had been the cause of so much speculation among the seven scouts;
+"I'll be glad to accept your kind offer. But there's another thing we'd
+like to know."
+
+"Speak up, then, and I'll be pleased to accommodate you, if the
+knowledge is in my power to bestow. This flood bids fair to bring our
+experiments to an end for the time being, even if the professor's
+weakness hadn't made it necessary that we get to some place where he can
+receive the right kind of care, to build up his strength. What's
+bothering you now, my boy?"
+
+"How about the wild man?" asked Bobolink.
+
+"Oh! he was here when we came, and we made friends with him," the other
+replied, promptly. "You see, some of us have been up here for a month. We
+had some new stuff shipped in those big cases; but it'll all be rusted
+now by this water. The poor fellow is harmless, for all he looks so
+fierce. Why, at the smell of coffee the tears trickled down his dirty
+cheeks like rain; it seemed to be just one last link that bound his
+flitting memory to something in the far-away past. We gave him an old
+saucepan to cook it in, and showed him how. Ever since he's visited us
+often, and we supplied him with food, because it seemed as though he was
+the one who had first right to this island."
+
+"I hope the poor old chap has the good sense to climb that hill, and get
+away from the rising water," remarked Jack, with some feeling. "Have you
+any idea who he can be, or where he came from?"
+
+"We made up our minds that he had been out of his head a long time, and
+perhaps had escaped from some institution. He mentioned the name of John
+Pennington once, and we think it must have been his. The professor
+intended to make inquiries, later on, and if possible have him returned
+to his home, wherever it might be."
+
+"Did he have a big yellow dog tied up at his shack?" asked Nuthin,
+eagerly, as though he wished to settle that point, because the animal in
+question had once belonged to the Cypher family.
+
+"Yes," answered Mr. Jameson, "but it got away from him one night, by
+breaking the rope, and he's been making a great fuss about it ever since.
+But from the ugly looks of the beast, I'd sooner put a bullet in him than
+try to make friends."
+
+"Well, that about finishes the list of questions we've been nearly dying
+to ask somebody," remarked Bobolink, "and seems like everything's been
+explained. What we want to know now, and there isn't a livin' soul c'n
+tell the answer to that, I reckon, is, how high is this old lake goin' to
+get before she commences to fall again? And how in Sam Hill are we
+expectin' to ride those motor-boats over that pile of rocks and mud, that
+lies in the outlet? Anybody know the answer? I'd like to hear it."
+
+But they shook their heads. Nobody could say, although all sorts
+of guesses ran the rounds, for the scouts were good hands at that
+sort of thing.
+
+The water was still rising, and apparently just as fast as ever. Already
+it had encroached upon the main part of the island; and Mr. Jameson
+declared that he was sure it must be all around the shed where they kept
+their machinery, that had been brought secretly to this isolated spot,
+where they hoped to complete the greatest marvel in the way of sensations
+ever known to curious crowds at watering places.
+
+"It'll be badly hurt, unless the water goes down soon," remarked the
+big man; "but that doesn't seem to be the worst thing that can happen,
+if what your Doctor Paul here, says, turns out to be true, and the
+water goes out of the lake in a raging torrent that may drag boats and
+all with it."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+GOOD-BYE TO CEDAR ISLAND
+
+
+They passed a most anxious hour, after the coming of the professor and
+his assistants. The lake kept on rising until pretty much all of the
+island except the hill was under water. Of course the trees stood out,
+but most of their roots were under ten feet or more of water.
+
+It would not last much longer, that they knew, for the supply must be
+falling short, and besides there was always a chance that the fearful
+force exerted by such a mass of pent-up water would break away the
+obstruction that clogged the outlet.
+
+Paul had done everything he could think of to add to their security in
+case the worst came. Some of the scouts were even perched in the
+neighboring trees. These were the more timid, who Paul knew were
+shivering from anxiety, and watching the spot where the lake water
+ordinarily escaped, as though dreading lest at any second they should see
+a sudden heave that would mean the beginning of the end.
+
+"Good news, Paul!" sang out Jud Elderkin, to whom had been delegated the
+duty of keeping watch on the rise of the flood. "She's stationary at last
+Never rose a bit the last ten minutes. And believe me, I honestly think
+she's begun to go down just a little."
+
+The other boys let out a cheer at this news. That was what they were all
+hoping for--that the water would go down gradually, so as not to endanger
+the motorboats.
+
+Just how the craft were to get out of the lake, if the exit remained
+closed, no one could say; but then they might look to Paul to open a way
+somehow. He could make use of some dynamite to blow up the obstructions,
+so Mr. Jameson had suggested, and it sounded all right.
+
+Five minutes later Jud was quite positive that the tide was on the ebb.
+
+"Two inches lower than she was at the highest point. Paul!" he called
+out, jubilantly.
+
+"Hurrah! that sounds good to me!" exclaimed Bobolink, swinging his
+campaign hat vigorously about his head, as he sat in the bow of the
+_Comfort_, it being a part of his task to watch the cable, and if the
+worst came to ease up on it so that there would be less likelihood of a
+sudden snap.
+
+"But we're not out of danger yet, remember," cautioned the scout master.
+
+Presently the water was lowering at a still faster rate.
+
+"Looks like the opening might be getting larger," said Jack, when this
+fact was made clear beyond any doubt.
+
+"Watch over there," said Paul, "and see if there's any sudden rush,
+though already the water is escaping so fast that I begin to believe we
+might hold on here, even if the whole pile of earth and rocks were washed
+away, leaving the channel clear."
+
+Five, ten, fifteen minutes crept along, and all the while the water kept
+going steadily down until much of the island could be seen again under
+the trees.
+
+"Oh! look, there she goes!" cried Bobolink, without warning, and thereby
+causing some of the fellows who had descended from the trees to wish they
+were aloft again.
+
+Over in the vicinity of the outlet they could see something of a
+commotion. The water seemed to be running down hill, as it struggled to
+pour out through the now cleared passage.
+
+Immediately the boats felt the suction, which must have been very strong
+indeed. They strained at their ropes, and those who had the cables in
+charge obeyed the instructions given to them, allowing a certain length
+of line to slip, thus easing the fearful drag.
+
+"Whoop! they're going to hold!" exclaimed Bobolink, in great glee.
+
+Paul believed so himself, and a smile came to his face that up to now had
+looked careworn and anxious; for a dreadful catastrophe had been hovering
+over them, he felt certain.
+
+And the ropes did make good, holding in spite of that fierce drag. The
+water soon got down to about its normal level, when the pull upon the
+hawsers ceased, and everything seemed to settle back into the old rut.
+
+But the boys had had quite enough of Cedar Island. It was water-soaked
+now, and offered little attraction to them for camping. Paul suggested
+that they leave the cove and head for a certain section of the main shore
+which, on account of being much higher than the island, had not been
+overflowed.
+
+There was not a single voice raised in opposition, and so they started
+the motors and with a series of derisive sounds that seemed almost like
+chuckles the boats said goodbye to Cedar Island. Landing they found a
+splendid spot for the erection of the tents, and before the coming of
+night the scouts were as snugly fixed as though nothing had happened to
+disturb them.
+
+The injured professor declared that he meant to stick by Paul until his
+messenger arrived with a carriage and a doctor by way of the road, which
+ran only a half mile away from the lake.
+
+He expressed himself satisfied with the work Paul had done on his arm,
+and believed it to be the right thing.
+
+They hoped to spend a quiet night. There would be no bomb explosions in
+the heavens to disturb them, at least. Mr. Jameson had already
+explained to the boys that, if they had happened to be awake at the
+time of that first tremendous shock, they must have seen by the glare
+in the heavens that it was a new kind of aerial bomb that had been
+fired; and possibly under such conditions some one of the scouts would
+have guessed the truth. But when they crept out of the tents there was
+nothing to be seen aloft.
+
+Luckily, these wide-awake boys could accommodate themselves to their
+surroundings. Their former experiences had made most of them
+quickwitted, resolute and cheerful under difficulties that might have
+daunted most lads.
+
+Although they had received a tremendous shock because of the numerous
+remarkable occurrences that had taken place since their landing on Cedar
+Island, now that their troubles seemed to have departed, most of the
+scouts were just as full of life and good-natured "chaff" as ever.
+
+Bluff seemed to never tire of entertaining those who had not been
+fortunate enough to be among the valiant band of explorers with
+wonderful accounts of all they had seen. He had them holding their
+very breath with awe, as he described, in his own way, how they first
+of all crept up to the shack in the thicket and looked in upon the
+wild man asleep.
+
+But when Bluff told of how he and his comrades had been warned off in
+such a dramatic manner by the unknown man, and immediately afterwards
+found themselves knocked down by that tremendous concussion, as the
+explosion took place, he had them hanging on his every sentence.
+
+But words failed Bluff when he tried to picture the wild scene that had
+followed. That furious scamper through the wooded part of the island must
+remain pretty much in the nature of a nightmare with the boys.
+
+Phil and Bobolink and Andy all eagerly chimed in, trying to do the
+subject justice, but after all it seemed beyond their powers. They could
+only end by holding up both hands, rolling their eyes, shrugging their
+shoulders, and then mutely pointing to the various cuts, scratches and
+contusions that decorated their faces. The rest had to be left to the
+imagination.
+
+Fortunately there was an abundance of witch hazel ointment along, so that
+every sufferer was able to anoint his hurts. The whole bunch seemed to
+fairly _glisten_ from the time of their arrival at the boats. Indeed,
+there never had been such a wholesale raid made upon the medical
+department since the Stanhope Troup of Banner Boy Scouts was organized.
+
+But after all was said and done they had come out of the whole affair at
+least with honor. And now that the peril was a thing of the past they
+could well afford to laugh at their adventures on Cedar Island.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+A SCOUT'S DUTY
+
+
+"Seems like a dream; don't it, Paul?"
+
+Jack dropped down beside the acting scout master as he made this
+remark. He had just stepped out from the new camp on the mainland, and
+found Paul sitting upon a log, looking across the water in the
+direction they had come.
+
+The sun was just setting, and a rosy flush filled the western heavens. It
+seemed to fall softly upon mysterious Cedar Island, nestling there in the
+midst of the now tranquil waters.
+
+Paul looked up with a smile, as he made room on the log for his chum, who
+had always been so willing to stand by him through thick and thin.
+
+"Well, do you know, Jack," he spoke, "that was just exactly what seemed
+to strike me. I was staring hard at the island, and wondering if I had
+been asleep and dreamed all those queer happenings. Fact is, just before
+you spoke I even pinched my leg to see if I was really wide awake."
+
+The other laughed at this.
+
+"Oh! you're awake, all right, Paul," he remarked. "You seemed to get off
+without any show of damage to your good-looking face. As for the rest of
+us, if ever we begin to think we've been and dreamed it, we've got a
+remedy better than pinching. All we have to do is to bend down over a
+still pool of water and take a look at our faces. That'll convince us in
+a hurry we _did_ have a lively time of it."
+
+Paul pointed across the lake to where the island lay bathed in that
+wonderful afterglow that shone from the painted heavens.
+
+"Did you ever see a prettier sight?" he asked. "It looks as peaceful as
+any picture could be. You wouldn't think a bunch of fellows could run up
+against such a lot of trouble over on such a fine little place as Cedar
+Island; would you, now?"
+
+"I feel the same way you do, Paul; and I'd say we never ought to have
+left it, only after the flood it'd be a muddy place, and we wouldn't take
+any pleasure getting around."
+
+"Oh! well," Paul rejoined cheerfully, "after all, perhaps it isn't our
+last visit up this way. Who knows but what we may have another chance to
+come over here and look around. It was a good scheme, I'm thinking, Jack,
+and we'll never be sorry we came."
+
+"I should say not," remarked the other, quickly; "just turn around and
+take a look back into our camp. See where Professor Hackett is lying
+propped up with pillows from the boats. Well, suppose we'd never come
+over this way, what d'ye think would have happened to him? He says he
+owes his life to your skill, Paul, and that, try as they would, Mr.
+Jameson and the other assistants couldn't seem to stop the bleeding. That
+alone pays us for all we've gone through, Paul."
+
+"I guess it does," Paul admitted, readily, "because he's a smart man, and
+has done a lot to entertain the crowds that go to the seashore to rest
+and forget their troubles. But I'm glad none of the boys seem to have
+suffered any serious damage from the effect of the explosion or that mad
+chase afterwards."
+
+"Yes, we ought to call ourselves lucky, and let it go at that,"
+Jack remarked.
+
+"When you think about all that might have happened, I tell you we've got
+lots of reason to be thankful," Paul went on, with considerable feeling.
+
+"Sure we have," added Jack. "Instead of that stick taking me in the
+cheek, it might have struck my eye and injured my sight for life."
+
+"And where I got only a wrench that may make me limp a little for a few
+days, I could have broken a leg," said Paul.
+
+"That's one of the rules scouts have to keep in mind, you know," Jack
+continued; "always be cheerful and look on the bright side of things. I
+reckon there never comes a time when you can't find a rainbow of promise
+if you look far enough. Things are never as bad as they might be."
+
+"The boys seem to have settled down here just as if they meant to enjoy
+the rest of the stay," Paul observed, as he turned his head again, so as
+to look at the bustling camp close by.
+
+"Yes, and even the very air seems to tell of peace and plenty," said
+Jack, with a little laugh, as he sniffed the appetizing odors that were
+beginning to announce that preparations for the evening meal had started.
+
+"You're right," agreed Paul, "I guess there's nothing more 'homey' than
+the smell of onions frying. I never get a whiff of it on the street of a
+winter evening but what I seem to see some of the camps I've been in. And
+then, just think how it gets your appetite on edge, till you can hardly
+wait for the cook to call out that supper's ready. But I was thinking of
+some other things when you came up."
+
+"I reckon I could mention one of them," said Jack.
+
+"Let's hear, then," the other demanded.
+
+Jack swept his hand down the lake in the direction of the outlet.
+
+"You're worrying about that," he said.
+
+"Well, that's just about the size of it, Jack. We know the lake's gone
+down to about what it was before the storm hit us; but what if a great
+big rock blocks the passage?"
+
+"You know what Mr. Jameson said you could do?" Jack remarked.
+
+"About the dynamite, to blast an opening big enough for our boats to get
+through? Yes, Jack, I suppose that could be done."
+
+"And he says he'll stand by to see that it _is_ done," the other
+continued. "As Mr. Jameson is an expert at all sorts of explosives, you
+can just make up your mind we'll have no trouble getting away. Besides,
+Paul, I've got a feeling that when we go down in the morning to take a
+survey, we'll be more than pleased with the way things look."
+
+"Which all sounds good to me," Paul hastened to declare. "Anyhow, I'm
+going to believe it's bound to turn out as you say. In spite of our
+troubles we've been a pretty lucky lot."
+
+"But you talked as though the getting away part of the business was only
+a part of what you had on your mind," Jack went on.
+
+"There was something else," the other scout admitted.
+
+"Suppose you open up and tell me, Paul; because somehow I don't seem to
+be able to get what you mean."
+
+"It seems to me," the patrol leader remarked, seriously, "that while all
+of us scouts, and the professor's party in the bargain, have been shaking
+hands with each other over the lucky escape we had, we've pretty near
+forgotten one poor chap."
+
+Jack gave a start, and then whistled softly.
+
+"That's right, Paul," he said, "for I take it you mean the crazy
+islander."
+
+"How do we know what happened to him?" Paul continued.
+
+"But Mr. Jameson seemed to feel sure he would take to the hill when the
+flood came," Jack replied. "And he also told us, you remember, that some
+of their food was at a higher point than the water could have reached.
+So, if the crazy man wanders about that camp, there's no need of his
+going hungry long."
+
+"I guess that's about so," Paul agreed, as though these words from his
+chum took away some of his anxiety. "From what they say, it seems as if
+he has come to look on them as friends. So, chances are ten to one he'd
+go to their different camps after the flood went down."
+
+"Queer how he came to be here," Jack remarked.
+
+"Oh, I don't know," the other observed; "there's no telling what a crazy
+person will do. His coming to this island must have been with the hazy
+notion that any one searching for him couldn't find him here."
+
+"Searching for him, Paul?"
+
+"Well, you remember Mr. Jameson said he had an idea the poor fellow must
+have escaped from some institution," Jack continued.
+
+"Yes, he did say that; and for all he looks so big and fierce, with his
+long hair and beard, he's harmless. But, Jack, between us now, do you
+think we could go back home when our little vacation trip is over and
+feel that we'd done _all_ our duty as true scouts, when that poor chap
+had been left up here--perhaps to starve on Cedar Island?"
+
+"Whew! You're the greatest boy I ever saw, Paul, to get a grip on a
+situation and remember things."
+
+"But--answer my question," persisted the other.
+
+"Well, what you said must be so," Jack acknowledged; "and it makes me
+feel pretty small to remember that, while we've all been feeling so merry
+over our wonderful escape, I'd forgotten all about _him_."
+
+"Jack, it's too late to do anything tonight, you know."
+
+"I reckon it is, Paul," replied the other, looking a bit anxiously across
+the water to where the glow was commencing to give way to shadows along
+the wooded shore of Cedar Island; "but if you thought best, I'd be
+willing to take the lantern and cross over with you."
+
+Paul thrust out his hand impulsively.
+
+"Shake on that, old chum," he exclaimed. "Your heart's as big as a bushel
+basket, and in the right place every time. But on the whole, Jack, I
+don't believe it would be the wise thing for us to do."
+
+"Just as you say, Paul; only I wanted you to know I was ready to back you
+up in anything."
+
+"We're both tired, and sore in the bargain," continued the scout
+master, steadily.
+
+"Yes," Jack admitted, unconsciously caressing his painful bruises.
+
+"The island is in a bad state just now, after being flooded," Paul
+continued.
+
+"That's right, I can jolly well believe it," his chum agreed.
+
+"And if the wild man hasn't been drowned, he'll surely be able to look
+out for himself a while longer. Mr. Jameson felt sure he wouldn't starve,
+with all the food they left behind."
+
+"Then it won't hurt to let it go till tomorrow, eh, Paul?"
+
+"I had made up my mind that we'd organize another party, this time taking
+some of the fellows who have been kept in camp, and comb Cedar Island
+from end to end to find that man."
+
+"A good plan, Paul," said the other scout; "but do you think he'll make
+friends with us, even when we find him?"
+
+"Mr. Jameson says he understands the peace sign," the scout master
+continued, "and must really have had a bright mind at some time. He told
+me he had an idea the man may have met with some injury that had
+unsettled his reason. He seemed to be greatly interested in all they were
+doing, and several times even made suggestions that startled the
+professor."
+
+"I remember that much, too," said Jack, "and Mr. Jameson also said he
+meant to try and learn if anybody knew about a John Pennington. That was
+the name the man spoke once in his rambling talk."
+
+"Well, perhaps we may be able in some way to do the poor fellow a good
+turn, Jack. I hope so, anyhow. My! how those boys are trying to beat the
+record at getting up a grand supper. Seems to me my appetite is growing
+at the rate of a mile a minute."
+
+"If it keeps on that way, good-bye to our stock of provisions," laughed
+Jack; "but, to tell the truth, I feel pretty much the same. The most
+welcome sound I could hear right now would be Bluff calling everybody to
+get a share of that fine mess."
+
+"Then you won't have to wait long, I guess," his chum declared,
+"because from all the signs of dishing out I imagine they're about ready
+right now."
+
+Paul proved a true prophet, for immediately Bluff began to ding-dong upon
+a sheet iron frying pan, using a big spoon to produce a discord that, in
+the ears of the hungry boys, was the sweetest music in the world.
+
+Gathering around, the scouts made a merry group as they proceeded to
+demolish the stacks of savory food that had been heaped upon their tin
+plates; and drink to each other's health in the fragrant coffee that
+steamed in the generous cups, also of tin, belonging to their mess chest.
+
+After supper the scouts sat around, and while some of them worked at
+various things in which they were particularly interested, such as
+developing the films that would give a dozen views of the great flood,
+others sang songs or listened to Mr. Jameson tell strange stories.
+
+The man had been to the corners of the world during a busy lifetime,
+often with scientific parties sent out by societies interested in
+geography, natural history or astronomy. And hence it had fallen to the
+lot of Mr. Jameson to experience some remarkable adventures. The boys
+felt that he was the most interesting talker they had ever met.
+
+After several hours had slipped by, some of the scouts, notably those
+who had been among the bold explorers band, were discovered to be nodding
+drowsily. Indeed, Andy and Tom Betts had gone sound asleep, just as they
+lay curled up before the fire. The warmth of the blaze, together with the
+unusual exertions of the day, had been too much for the boys.
+
+And so the bugler was told to sound "taps" to signify that it was time
+they crawled under their blankets.
+
+A few chose to sleep aboard the motor boats, which, of course, relieved
+the tents from overcrowding. Professor Hackett and his assistants had
+been lodged in one of the tents, which fact had something to do with the
+lack of room.
+
+But presently all these things had been arranged. Paul himself intended
+to pass the night in the open. He declared he would really enjoy the
+experience; and two others insisted on keeping him company--little Nuthin
+and Bobolink.
+
+So Paul, who knew a lot about these things, showed them just how to wrap
+themselves up like mummies in their blankets, and then lie with their
+feet to the fire. He said old hunters and cowboys always slept that way
+when camping in the open.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+Paul was awakened by feeling something nudging him in the ribs. It was
+Bobolink's elbow; and, thinking at first that it might be an accident,
+the scout master made no move.
+
+But again he received a severe jolt. And at the same time came a whisper
+close in his ear:
+
+"Paul! Are you awake?" Bobolink was saying, so low that any one six feet
+away could not have heard his voice.
+
+"What ails you?" asked Paul.
+
+He might have imagined that the other had been taken ill, from over
+feeding, perhaps, and wanted Paul, as the doctor of the troop, to give
+him some medicine. But on second thought Paul realized that there was too
+much mystery about the action of Bobolink to admit of such an
+explanation.
+
+"Listen, Paul," the other went on, still whispering, "there's some sort
+of wild beast goin' to raid the camp!"
+
+"What's that?" asked the scout master, a little sternly, for, knowing
+the weakness of Bobolink in the line of practical joking, he suspected
+that the other might be up to some of his old tricks.
+
+And Bobolink must have detected an air of doubt in the manner in which
+Paul spoke those two words, for he immediately resumed:
+
+"Honest Injun, Paul, I ain't foolin'! Say, do they have panthers around
+here? Because that's what I think it must be."
+
+"Where'd you see it?"
+
+As Paul put this question he was working his arms free from the folds of
+his blanket. When he lay down, more through force of habit than because
+he thought there would be any need of such a thing, Paul had placed his
+shotgun on the ground beside him. And no sooner was his right hand at
+liberty than, groping around, he took possession of it.
+
+"Up in that big oak tree," Bobolink went on. "You watch where that limb
+hangs out over the camp and you'll see somethin' move; or I've been
+dreamin', that's all."
+
+Paul did not have to twist his head very far around in order to see the
+spot in question. He watched it as the seconds began to troop along,
+until almost a fell minute had gone.
+
+And Paul was just about to believe Bobolink must have been dreaming, when
+he, too, saw the bunch of leaves violently agitated.
+
+Undoubtedly some tree-climbing animal was up there. Paul felt a thrill
+pass through him. Unconsciously, perhaps, his fingers tightened their
+grip upon the shotgun, which was apt to prove a tower of strength in case
+the worst that could happen came to pass.
+
+Straining his eyes, as he partly lifted his head, Paul believed he could
+just make out a shadowy form stretched upon the large oak limb.
+
+He was more than puzzled.
+
+Wild animals were not altogether unknown within the twenty-mile limit
+around Stanhope. A bear might be seen occasionally--or at least the
+tracks of one, for the timid beast knew enough to hide in the daytime in
+one of the numerous swamps.
+
+But this did not seem large enough for a bear, which would have surely
+made a more bulky object clinging to the limb. Moreover, bears were not
+reckoned bold, and no hunter had ever known one to come spying around a
+camp. As soon as the trail of human beings is run across by a bear, the
+animal always takes the alarm and hastens to its den, to lie low until
+the danger has passed.
+
+But Bobolink had mentioned the magic word "panther," and this caused the
+other aroused scout to look more closely at the dimly seen object Sure
+enough it did seem to be flattened out on the limb, much as Paul
+imagined a big cat might lie.
+
+"What'd we better do about it, Paul--give a yell and jump up?" Bobolink
+asked, his voice quivering, perhaps with excitement, or it might be under
+stress of alarm; for it was not the nicest thing in the world to be lying
+there helpless with a hungry panther crouching above.
+
+"Wait, and let's make sure," replied the careful Paul.
+
+Some impetuous boys would have thought, the very first thing, of bringing
+that double-barrelled gun to bear on the dark, shadowy figure, and
+cutting loose, perhaps even firing both charges at once.
+
+At such close range, less than thirty feet, a shell containing even bird
+shot is apt to be projected with all the destructive qualities of a large
+bullet. Paul knew all about this, and also had faith in the hard-hitting
+qualities of his long tested gun; but he was not the one to be tempted
+into any rash action.
+
+"Be sure you're right; then go ahead," was a motto which Paul always
+tried to practice. He had certainly found it worth while on more than one
+occasion in the past, and it was likely to serve him well now.
+
+And so he waited, ready for a sudden emergency, but not allowing himself
+to be hurried.
+
+He soon had reason to feel very thankful that his good sense had
+prevailed, for presently the leaves were again set to shaking and, as
+they parted, Paul saw something that gave him a shock.
+
+"Oh! what d'ye think of that, now? It's the wild man of Cedar Island!"
+gasped Bobolink, actually sitting up in his excitement.
+
+And Paul had already made certain of this fact as soon as his eyes
+fell upon the hairy face seen among the branches. The shudder that
+passed through his frame had nothing to do with fear. Paul was only
+horrified to realize what might have happened had he taken Bobolink's
+suggestion for the truth, and fully believed the figure in the oak to
+be a savage panther.
+
+"We'd better let Mr. Jameson know," Paul remarked, as he also sat up and
+cleared his legs of the blanket.
+
+"Yes, he'll know how to get him down. I bet you, Paul, the feller went
+and swam across from the island. But how would he guess we were here?"
+
+"Oh! he could see the boats in the day time; and don't forget we've had a
+fire burning all night, so far," said the scout master.
+
+When Mr. Jameson came out of the tent, in answer to Paul's low summons,
+and learned what had happened, he readily agreed to influence the wild
+man to come down. The poor fellow had learned to look on Mr. Jameson as
+a friend, and, realizing that he had abandoned the island, doubtless it
+was his desire to see him again that had induced this visit.
+
+He proved to be harmless, and upon being given food ate ravenously. Later
+on it was discovered that he had launched a log and made his way to the
+mainland by means of this crude craft, with a branch for a paddle.
+
+Mr. Jameson declared that he would take the stranger to Stanhope when the
+vehicle came for the professor, and do all in his power to learn just who
+he was, as well as get him safely back among his friends.
+
+To dispose of the wild man of Cedar Island once and for all, it might be
+said right here that Mr. Jameson kept his word. The name John Pennington
+served as a clue, and in the end he learned that was his name. He had
+lost his mind through an accident and, though his case was deemed
+hopeless, occasionally he was apt to have little flashes of his former
+cleverness. He was returned to the sanitarium from which he had escaped,
+and the boys never heard of him again. But the memory of the wild man
+would always be associated with Cedar Island.
+
+On the following day Paul and Jack managed to get around to the outlet,
+for the scout master was anxious to learn what the chances of their
+leaving the lake, when they were ready, might be.
+
+They found that, just as had been believed that shoulder of rock and
+earth had been shaken loose by the tremor of the earth at the time of the
+big shock, when the professor was experimenting with some new explosive.
+
+In falling, it had indeed dammed the outlet, and the storm coming so soon
+after, of course the water in the lake had risen at a frightful rate. In
+the end the obstruction had commenced to disappear; but luckily for all
+concerned, it had held fairly well until much of the water had escaped,
+when finally it had given way.
+
+The channel was as good as ever; indeed, Paul seemed to think that
+it offered fewer impediments to a passage now than before all this
+had happened.
+
+That eased the minds of the scouts, and they could go back again to their
+camp with good news for the others.
+
+A carriage came that day for the professor, and his assistants managed to
+carry him across country to the road; just as they had undoubtedly done
+the two big boxes of material that came from Mr. Stormways' mill that
+other day.
+
+He shook hands with each and every scout before leaving, and promised to
+remember them always for what they had done. When he came to Paul, he
+clung to his hand, and there were tears in the eyes of the little
+professor as he, said:
+
+"I honestly believe that you saved my life, my boy, and I trust that
+through your ability I may be spared a few more years. And depend on it,
+I'm never going to let you get out of touch with me, Paul Morrison. I
+hope to live to see you a great surgeon, some day."
+
+The scouts filled out the balance of their vacation at the lake, and
+considered that they had had some of the strangest experiences that could
+happen to a group of boys; but although at the time they could not
+suspect it, there were still more interesting things in store for Paul
+and his comrades of Stanhope Troop of Boy Scouts. What these were, you
+will find related in the next volume of this series, to be called, "The
+Banner Boy Scouts Snowbound; Or, A Tour on Skates and Iceboats."
+
+When the time came for them to start back, it was with more or less
+anxiety that they came to the canal connecting the waters of the two
+rivers flowing parallel for a few miles, and only a short distance apart.
+
+But they need not have borrowed trouble, for the Bushkill was still
+higher than usual at this season of the year and all through the
+disused canal they found plenty of water, so that neither of the boats
+stuck in the mud.
+
+In good time, then, the Banner Boy Scouts arrived home, to thrill the
+lads who had not been fortunate enough to accompany them on their trip
+afloat, with wonderful accounts of all the remarkable things which had
+happened to them while in camp on Cedar Island.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Banner Boy Scouts Afloat, by George A. Warren
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE BANNER BOY SCOUTS AFLOAT ***
+
+***** This file should be named 9948.txt or 9948.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/9/9/4/9948/
+
+Produced by Juliet Sutherland, Mary Meehan, and the Project
+Gutenberg Online Distributed Proofreading Team
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.